Honda - HR-V - Owners Manual - 2020 - 2020.PDF

Owner’s Manual 2020 HR-V 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 0 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 3 WARNING California Proposition 65 Warning Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner. Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 1 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others. As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment. Software End User License Agreement You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including: Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner’s Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A, 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746. Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices. A Few Words About Safety Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility. ● Safety Labels - on the vehicle. ● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These signal words mean: 3DANGER You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. 3WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions. 3CAUTION You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions. ● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. ● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. ● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely. This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 2 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Contents This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold. This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model. Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features. This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada. 2 Safe Driving P. 33 For Safe Driving P. 34 Airbags P. 50 2 Instrument Panel P. 79 Indicators P. 80 Gauges and Displays P. 113 2 Controls P. 133 Clock P. 134 Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 136 Opening and Closing the Windows P. 162 Moonroof * P. 164 Adjusting the Seats P. 190 Climate Control System * P. 216 2 Features P. 227 Audio System P. 228 Audio System Basic Operation P. 234, 255 Customized Features P. 345, 352 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * P. 367 2 Driving P. 423 Before Driving P. 424 Braking P. 503 The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. Seat Belts P. 40 Towing a Trailer P. 429 Parking Your Vehicle P. 510 2 Maintenance P. 517 Before Performing Maintenance P. 518 Maintenance MinderTM P. 521 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 551 Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 570 2 Handling the Unexpected P. 579 Tools P. 580 Overheating P. 597 If a Tire Goes Flat P. 582 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 599 Fuses P. 604 2 Information P. 613 Specifications P. 614 Emissions Testing P. 619 Identification Numbers P. 616 Warranty Coverages P. 621 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 3 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Contents Quick Reference Guide Child Safety P. 64 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 77 Tailgate P. 156 Security System P. 159 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 165 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 201 P. 4 Safety Labels P. 78 Safe Driving P. 33 Instrument Panel P. 79 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 187 Heating and Cooling System * P. 212 Audio Error Messages P. 323 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 370, 393 General Information on the Audio System P. 329 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 430 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 511 When Driving P. 432 Refueling P. 513 Maintenance Under the Hood P. 529 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 555 Cleaning P. 571 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 541 Battery P. 566 Accessories and Modifications P. 576 Engine Does Not Start P. 591 Emergency Towing P. 609 Jump Starting P. 594 Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 596 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate P. 610 Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 617 Authorized Manuals P. 623 Reporting Safety Defects P. 618 Customer Service Information P. 624 Honda Sensing® * P. 460 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 515 Controls P. 133 Features P. 227 Driving P. 423 Maintenance P. 517 Handling the Unexpected P. 579 Information P. 613 Index P. 626 Remote Transmitter Care P. 568 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 4 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Quick Reference Guide Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ System Indicators (P80) ❙ Gauges (P113) ❙ Information Display * (P115) ❙ Multi-Information Display * (P118) ❙ Hazard Warning Button ❙ Audio/Information Screen (P235, 256) ❙ Audio System (P228) ❙ Navigation System * () See the Navigation System Manual ❙ Heating and Cooling System * (P212) ❙ Climate Control System * (P216) ❙ Rear Defogger (P182) ❙ Heated Mirror Icon * (P182) ❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P166) ❙ Ignition Switch * (P165) ❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P186) ❙ ECON Button (P446) ❙ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Button * (P456) ❙ (Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P451) ❙ Heated Windshield Button * (P183) ❙ Road Departure Mitigation Button * (P495) ❙ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) OFF Button * (P463) *1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 4 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 5 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Quick Reference Guide ❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P170) ❙ Fog Lights * (P174) ❙ LaneWatchTM* (P452) ❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift Down) * (P 445) ❙ (Display) Button * (P235) ❙ (Select/Reset) Knob (P115, 119) ❙ Brightness Control (P184) ❙ Horn (Press an area around .) ❙ MAIN Button (P474) ❙ Paddle Shifter (Shift Up) * (P445) ❙ Wipers/Washers (P179) ❙ Cruise Control Buttons * (P447) ❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Buttons * (P474) ❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button * (P488) ❙ (Information) Buttons * (P118) ❙ SEL/RESET Button * (P119) ❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System (P370, 393) ❙ Voice Control Buttons (P370, 393) ❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons * () See the Navigation System Manual ❙ Audio Remote Control Buttons (P231) * Not available on all models 5 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 6 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ Power Window Switches (P162) ❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P150) ❙ Door Mirror Controls (P189) ❙ Interior Fuse Boxes (P606) ❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P53) ❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag (P53) ❙ Seat Heater Icons * (P211) ❙ Glove Box (P203) ❙ Shift Lever Continuously Variable Transmission (P440, 442) ❙ Accessory Power Socket (P207) ❙ USB Port(s) (P229) ❙ Electric Parking Brake Switch (P503) ❙ Automatic Brake Hold Button (P506) ❙ Hood Release Handle (P530) ❙ Fuel Fill Door Release Handle (P514) 6 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 7 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Quick Reference Guide ❙ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor (P47) ❙ Seat Belts (P40) ❙ Seat Belts (Installing a Child Seat) (P71) ❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P73) ❙ Grab Handle ❙ Coat Hook (P208) ❙ Interior Lights (P201) ❙ Map Lights (P202) ❙ Moonroof Switch * (P164) ❙ Rearview Mirror (P187) ❙ HomeLink® Buttons * (P368) ❙ Sun Visors ❙ Vanity Mirrors ❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P59) ❙ Side Airbags (P57) ❙ Front Seat (P190) ❙ Accessory Power Socket ❙ Rear Seat (P193) ❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P69) ❙ Cargo Area Light (P202) ❙ Cargo Cover * (P210) ❙ Cargo Floor Box (P206) ❙ Accessory Power Socket * (P207) (P207) * Not available on all models 7 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 8 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Visual Index Quick Reference Guide ❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P529) ❙ Windshield Wipers (P179, 551) ❙ Power Door Mirrors (P189) ❙ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P170, 546) ❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P139) ❙ Headlights (P171, 541) ❙ Front Turn Signal Lights (P170, 543) ❙ Front Side Marker Lights (P171, 544) ❙ Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P544) ❙ Tires (P555, 582) ❙ Fog Lights * (P174, 545) ❙ How to Refuel (P514) ❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P549) ❙ Rear Wiper (P181, 553) ❙ Rear License Plate Lights (P550) ❙ Opening/Closing the Tailgate (P156) ❙ Tailgate Release Button (P157) ❙ Lock Button * (P140) ❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P511) ❙ Back-Up Lights (P548) ❙ Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights (P549) ❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P547) 8 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 9 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Eco Assist® System Quick Reference Guide Models with multi-information display The message is displayed for a few seconds when the ECON button is pressed. Ambient Meter The color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being driven in a fuel efficient manner. ECON Mode Indicator (P93) Comes on when ECON button is pressed. ECON Button (P446) Helps maximize fuel economy. * Not available on all models 9 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 10 ページ Safe Driving ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 (P 33) Quick Reference Guide Airbags (P50) ● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision. Child Safety (P64) ● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. ● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. ● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat. Exhaust Gas Hazard (P77) ● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate. Seat Belts (P40) ● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat. ● Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly. Before Driving Checklist (P38) ● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted. 10 Fasten your lap belt as low as possible. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 11 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Instrument Panel 木曜日 午後３時５２分 (P79) Models with information display System Indicators Tachometer Speedometer Information Display Fog Light Indicator * Malfunction Indicator Lamp High Beam Indicator Charging System Indicator Lights On Indicator Low Oil Pressure Indicator System Indicators Supplemental Restraint System Indicator High Temperature Indicator (Red)/Low Temperature Indicator (Blue) Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator VSA® OFF Indicator Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator Automatic Brake Hold Indicator Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Electric Parking Brake Indicator Lights Indicators Quick Reference Guide Gauges (P113)/Information Display * (P115)/Multi-Information Display *(P118)/ System Indicators (P80) Security System Alarm Indicator M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator * Immobilizer System Indicator Fuel Gauge Shift Lever Position Indicator/ Transmission System Indicator System Indicators Maintenance Minder Indicator Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators ECON Mode Indicator System Indicators CRUISE MAIN Indicator CRUISE CONTROL Indicator Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Indicator Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator Brake System Indicator (Red) Brake System Indicator (Amber) Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator Low Fuel Indicator All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System Indicator * Brake Depressing Indicator * Not available on all models 11 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 12 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Models with multi-information display System Indicators Quick Reference Guide Malfunction Indicator Lamp System Indicators Shift Lever Position Indicator/ Transmission System Indicator Speedometer Low Oil Pressure Indicator Multi-Information Display Charging System Indicator Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator VSA® OFF Indicator Canada U.S. Canada Automatic Brake Hold Indicator Canada Electric Parking Brake System Indicator U.S. Canada 12 Security System Alarm Indicator Fuel Gauge M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator * Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator U.S. 002300 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) Electric Parking Brake Indicator Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Immobilizer System Indicator Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator U.S. Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators Tachometer System Indicators High Temperature Indicator (Red)/Low Temperature Indicator (Blue) Smart Entry System Indicator * Lights Indicators ECON Mode Indicator Lights On Indicator System Message Indicator High Beam Indicator Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator * Fog Light Indicator * Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator (Amber/ Green) Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber/ Green) Auto High-Beam Indicator All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System Indicator * 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book Controls 13 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 (P133) Models with display audio system Models with color audio system Quick Reference Guide Clock (P134) Models with navigation system The navigation system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically. Models without navigation system The clock in the multi-information display */ information display * is automatically updated along with the audio system’s clock display. a Select the Settings. a Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button. b Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment. b Rotate . to change hour, then press c Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting 3 / 4 . c Rotate press . to change minute, then d Select OK. d Select SET, then press (HOME) icon, then select . These indications are used to show how to operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob. • Rotate to select. • Press to enter. * Not available on all models 13 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 14 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 ENGINE START/STOP Button * (P166) Quick Reference Guide Press the button to change the vehicle’s power mode. 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Lights (P171) Wipers and Washers Light Control Switches (P179) U.S. models Wiper/Washer Control Lever High Beam Low Beam Adjustment Ring * (- : Low Sensitivity*1 (- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2 (+ : High Sensitivity*1 (+ : Higher speed, more sweeps*2 Flashing Canadian models Pull toward you to spray washer fluid. High Beams Turn Signals (P170) Turn Signal Control Lever Right Flashing the high beams Low Beams MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe Left *1 : Models with automatic intermittent wipers *2 : Models without automatic intermittent wipers 14 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 15 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Steering Wheel (P186) To adjust 午後３時５２分 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside Tailgate (P156) (P149) ● Pull either front door inner handle to unlock and open it in one motion. To lock Models without smart entry system Quick Reference Guide To adjust, pull the adjustment lever towards you, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place. 木曜日 ● With all the doors unlocked, press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate. Models with smart entry system ● Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors. ● Press the tailgate release button to unlock and open the tailgate when you carry the smart entry remote. * Not available on all models 15 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 16 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Power Door Mirrors (P189) Quick Reference Guide ● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, move the selector switch to L or R. ● Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. Selector Switch 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Power Windows (P162) ● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open and close the power windows. ● If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger’s window can be opened and closed with its own switch. ● If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator on), each passenger’s window switch is disabled. Power Window Lock Button Adjustment Switch Window Switch *1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 16 Indicator 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 17 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Heating and Cooling System * (P212) Rotate the fan control dial to adjust the fan speed. Rotate the mode control dial ( / / / / ) to select the vents air flows from. Rotate the temperature control dial to adjust the temperature. Rotate the fan control dial to OFF to turn the system off. Rotate the mode control dial to to defrost the windshield. Air flows from dashboard vents. Air flows from floor and dashboard vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. Quick Reference Guide ● ● ● ● ● Air flows from windshield defroster vents. Fan Control Dial Temperature Control Dial Mode Control Dial A/C (Air Conditioning) Button (Recirculation) Button * Not available on all models 17 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 18 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Climate Control System * (P216) Quick Reference Guide ● Select the AUTO icon to activate the climate control system. ● Select the icon to turn the system on or off. ● Select the icon to defrost the windshield. Models without SYNC icon Air flows from dashboard vents. Air flows from floor and dashboard vents. Air flows from floor vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. Temperature Control Icons Fan Control Icons AUTO Icon (On/Off) Icon A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon (Recirculation) Icon 18 (Windshield Defroster) Icon (Fresh Air) Icon Mode Control Icon 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 19 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Models with SYNC icon Fan Control Icons Air flows from floor and dashboard vents. Air flows from floor vents. Quick Reference Guide Air flows from dashboard vents. Air flows from floor and windshield defroster vents. Mode Control Icon Driver Side Temperature Control Icons Passenger Side Temperature Control Icons AUTO Icon (On/Off) Icon (Windshield Defroster) Icon SYNC (Synchronization) Icon A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon (Recirculation) Icon * Not available on all models 19 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book Features 20 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Quick Reference Guide (P231) / Buttons SOURCE Button ● (+ / (- Button Press to adjust the volume up/down. ● SOURCE Button Models with color audio system Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/ CD/USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio. Models with display audio system Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/ SiriusXM® */USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio/ Pandora® */Apps/Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM. 20 午後３時５２分 (P227) Audio Remote Controls (+ / (- / 木曜日 ● / Button Radio:Press to change the preset station. Press and hold to select the next or previous strong station. CD */USB device: Press to skip to the beginning of the next song or return to the beginning of the current song. Press and hold to change a folder. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 21 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Audio System (P228) For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual Audio/Information Screen (Day/Night) Button CD Slot Quick Reference Guide Models with color audio system (P234) (CD Eject) Button (Phone) Button RADIO Button MEDIA Button (Sound) Button LIST/SELECT Knob VOL / (Volume/Power) Knob MENU/CLOCK Button (Back) Button / (Skip/Seek) Buttons Preset Buttons (1-6) * Not available on all models 21 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 22 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Models with display audio system (P255) Quick Reference Guide (Day/Night) Button (Home) Icon (Menu) Icon (Back) Icon VOL / 22 (Volume/Power) Knob Audio/Information Screen 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book Driving 23 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 (P423) (P440, 442) ● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode * (P444) ● Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or down without removing your hands from the steering wheel. When the shift lever is in (S Shifting Models with paddle shifters Models without paddle shifters Depress the brake pedal and press the release button to move out of (P . Move the shift lever without pressing the release button. Press the release button to move the shift lever. ● Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode. ● The M indicator and the selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. When the shift lever is in (D ● Pulling a paddle shifter temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is displayed in the shift indicator. M Indicator Shift Lever Park Turn off or start the engine. Transmission is locked. Reverse Used when reversing. Neutral Transmission is not locked. Drive Normal driving. On models with paddle shifters, 7-speed mode can be used temporarily. Models with paddle shifters Drive (S) 7-speed manual shift mode can be used. Quick Reference Guide Continuously Variable Transmission Release Button Shift Down (Paddle Shifter Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter Shift Indicator Models without paddle shifters Drive (S) ● Better acceleration ● Used to increase engine braking ● Used when going up or down hills Models without paddle shifters Low ● Used to further increase engine braking ● Used when going up or down hills * Not available on all models 23 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 24 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 午後３時５２分 Quick Reference Guide VSA® On and Off (P451) CMBSTM On and Off * ● The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. ● VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine. ● To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. (P466) Cruise Control * (P447) ● Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. ● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE button, then press the -/SET button once you have achieved the desired speed (above 25 mph or 40 km/h). U.S. models only Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P455) ● Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures. ● TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine. ● A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise. 24 木曜日 ● When a possible collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision. ● The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine. ● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and hold the button until you hear a beep. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 25 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Refueling (P513) a Pull the fuel fill door release handle. b Turn the fuel fill cap slowly to remove the cap. c Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door. d After refueling, screw the cap back on until it clicks at least once. Quick Reference Guide Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L) * Not available on all models 25 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 26 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Honda Sensing® * Quick Reference Guide Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor located in the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror. The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. Front Sensor Camera 木曜日 午後３時５２分 (P 460) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 463) Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (P 473) Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. Radar Sensor The radar sensor is in the front grille. 26 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 486) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System (P 495) Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 27 ページ Maintenance ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 (P517) a Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard. b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever. c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in place. Quick Reference Guide Under the Hood (P529) ● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and window washer fluid. Add when necessary. ● Check brake fluid. ● Check the battery condition monthly. Wiper Blades (P551) ● Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield. Tires (P555) Lights (P541) ● Inspect tires and wheels regularly. ● Check tire pressures regularly. ● Install snow tires for winter driving. ● Inspect all lights regularly. * Not available on all models 27 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 28 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Handling the Unexpected Quick Reference Guide Flat Tire (P582) Engine Won’t Start (P591) Overheating (P597) ● Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the cargo area. ● If the battery is dead, jump start using a booster battery. ● Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down. Indicators Come On Blown Fuse (P604) Emergency Towing (P599) ● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate. (P609) ● Identify the indicator and consult the owner’s manual. 28 (P579) ● Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 29 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 What to Do If Canadian models with smart entry system The power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to ACCESSORY. Why? Models without smart entry system • The steering wheel may be locked. Models without smart entry system • Try to turn the steering wheel left and right while turning the ignition key. Models with smart entry system • Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button. Quick Reference Guide Models without smart entry system The ignition switch does not turn from (0 to (q . Why? The shift lever should be moved to (P . The ignition switch does not turn from (q to (0 and I cannot remove the key. Why? Models with smart entry system The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why? 29 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 30 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Quick Reference Guide Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes? 木曜日 午後３時５２分 This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal. 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P508) The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why? Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, push the lever to the unlock position. Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors? If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security. Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver’s door? The beeper sounds when: • The exterior lights are left on. Models without smart entry system • The key is left in the ignition switch. Models with smart entry system • The power mode is in ACCESSORY. 30 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 31 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Models with smart entry system 午後３時５２分 The beeper sounds if you move outside the walk away auto lock operating range before the door completely closes. 2 Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) (P142) Why does the beeper sound when I start driving? The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts. Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal? The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Pressing the electric parking brake switch does not release the parking brake. Why? Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed. Depressing the accelerator pedal does not release the parking brake automatically. Why? • Fasten the driver’s seat belt. • Check if the transmission is in (P or (N . If so, select any other Quick Reference Guide Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door? 木曜日 position. 31 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 32 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 U.S. models only Quick Reference Guide 32 I’m seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that? 木曜日 午後３時５２分 The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system. 2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P455) 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 33 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Safe Driving You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual. For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions.............. 34 Important Handling Information......... 36 Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 37 Safety Checklist ................................. 38 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts ........................ 40 Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 44 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 49 Airbags Airbag System Components ............... 50 Types of Airbags ................................ 53 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 53 Side Airbags....................................... 57 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 59 Airbag System Indicators.................... 61 Airbag Care ....................................... 63 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 64 Safety of Infants and Small Children... 66 Safety of Larger Children ................... 75 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas ....................... 77 Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 78 33 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 34 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 For Safe Driving The following pages explain your vehicle’s safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important. Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions ■ Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly. ■ Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat. ■ Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual. ■ Don’t drink and drive Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don’t drink and drive, and don’t let your friends drink and drive, either. 34 1Important Safety Precautions Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 35 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions ■ Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted. Safe Driving ■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving. ■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. ■ Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the heating and cooling system */climate control system * is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the heating and cooling system */climate control system * can shut off at any time. * Not available on all models 35 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 36 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Handling Information Important Handling Information Safe Driving 36 Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a higher center gravity making it more susceptible to tipping or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. 1Important Handling Information For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read: 2 Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle P. 438 2 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines P. 430 Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 37 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features Your Vehicle’s Safety Features 1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features 9 8 6 10 7 8 10 11 7 6 7 8 9 10 11 Safety Cage Crush Zones Seats and Seat-Backs Head Restraints Collapsible Steering Column Seat Belts Front Airbags Side Airbags Side Curtain Airbags Door Locks Seat Belt Tensioners Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a sufficient crash. Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash. 9 However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly. The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers. 37 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 38 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist Safety Checklist Safe Driving For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive. • After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. Locking the doors and the tailgate helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door or the tailgate. 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 148 • Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 190 • Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position. 2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 197 • Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44 • Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height and weight. 2 Child Safety P. 64 38 * Not available on all models 1Safety Checklist Models with information display If the door and tailgate open indicator is on, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the indicator goes off. 2 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator * P. 89 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 39 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist 1Safety Checklist Models with multi-information display * Not available on all models Safe Driving If the door and/or tailgate open message appears on the multi-information display, a door and/or the tailgate is not completely closed. Close all doors and the tailgate tightly until the message disappears. 2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * P. 100 39 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 40 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts Safe Driving Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags. In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers ■ Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body. The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats. 2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 71 40 1About Your Seat Belts 3 WARNING Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly. Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury. Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts. If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 41 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts Continued 1About Your Seat Belts If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then refasten the belt. Safe Driving ■ Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: • All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. • Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. • Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. 41 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 42 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Seat Belt Reminder Models with information display Safe Driving Models with multi-information display 1Seat Belt Reminder The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened. The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 42 The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them. 2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 64 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 43 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts ■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety. The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash. During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates. Safe Driving The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags. 1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners 43 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 44 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Fastening a Seat Belt After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well back in the seat: 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 190 Safe Driving Pull out slowly. Correct Seated Posture. Buckle No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible. Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism. 2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything. Latch Plate 44 1. Pull the seat belt out slowly. 1Fastening a Seat Belt If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair. 2 About Your Seat Belts P. 40 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 49 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 45 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt Continued 1Fastening a Seat Belt 3 WARNING Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash. Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving. Safe Driving Lap belt as low as possible 3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries. 4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body. To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door. 45 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 46 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor Safe Driving The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants. 1. Move the anchor up and down while pulling the shoulder anchor outward. 2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. Pull outward 46 1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time. After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 47 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor 1Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor 3 WARNING Using the seat belt with the detachable anchor unlatched increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash. Before using the seat belt, make sure the detachable anchor is correctly latched. Small Latch Plate 2. Line up the triangle marks on the small latch plate and anchor buckle. Make sure the seat belt is not twisted. Attach the belt to the anchor buckle. Safe Driving 1. Pull out the seat belt’s small latch plate and the latch plate from each holding slot in the ceiling. Latch Plate To unlatch the detachable anchor, insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. Anchor Buckle Latch Plate 3. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. Properly fasten the seat belt the same way you fasten the lap/shoulder seat belt. Anchor Buckle Latch Plate Buckle Continued 47 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 48 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt ■ Advice for Pregnant Women Safe Driving If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen. Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips. 48 1Advice for Pregnant Women Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive. To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag: • When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. • When sitting in the front passenger’s seat, adjust the seat as far back as possible. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 49 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection Seat Belt Inspection Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows: 3 WARNING Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed. Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible. Safe Driving • Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. • Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract. 1Seat Belt Inspection Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision. 49 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 50 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Airbags Airbag System Components Safe Driving 8 10 8 7 12 9 6 8 8 8 11 8 50 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 51 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver’s airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger’s airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG. b Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG. d An electronic control unit that, when the vehicle is on, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information. e Automatic front seat belt tensioners. In addition, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened. fA driver’s seat position sensor. This sensor determines the optimal force at which the airbag will deploy in a crash. h Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact. i An indicator near the shift lever that alerts you that the front passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. j An indicator on the instrument panel that Safe Driving The front, front side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes: alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners. k Safing Sensor lA rollover sensor that detects if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags. c Two g Weight sensors in the front passenger’s seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be turned off if the weight on the seat is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child). Continued 51 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 52 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components ■ Important Facts About Your Airbags Safe Driving Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly. What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible. Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy. Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates. Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate. 52 1Important Facts About Your Airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection. When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 53 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags Types of Airbags 1Types of Airbags The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Safe Driving Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags: • Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats. • Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs. • Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages. Front Airbags (SRS) The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant’s primary restraint system. ■ Housing Locations 1Front Airbags (SRS) During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes. The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 53 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 54 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Operation Safe Driving Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate. A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall. ■ How the Front Airbags Work While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest. The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won’t interfere with the driver’s visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls. The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them. 54 1How the Front Airbags Work Although the driver’s and front passenger’s airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 55 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) Continued Safe Driving ■ When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. ■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. ■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed. 55 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 56 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS) ■ Advanced Airbags 1Advanced Airbags Safe Driving The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants. The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor. If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver’s seating position) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact. Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver’s airbag. • Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats. • Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat. • Make sure any objects are positioned properly on Driver’s Seat Position Sensor The front passenger’s advanced airbag system has weight sensors. Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors 56 We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat. However, if you do allow a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger’s seat, note that the system will automatically turn off the front passenger’s airbag if the sensors detect that the child is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less. For the advanced airbags to work properly: the floor. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors. • All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat belts properly. • Do not cover the passenger’s side dashboard with a cloth, towel, cover, etc. 2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 62 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 57 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags Side Airbags The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG. Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury. Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates. Safe Driving ■ Housing Locations 1Side Airbags Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact. Housing Location ■ Operation When inflated When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate. Side Airbag Continued 57 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 58 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuSide Airbags ■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Safe Driving 58 Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. ■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears severe It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 59 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags Side Curtain Airbags ■ Housing Locations The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle. 1Side Curtain Airbags If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt tensioners. If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle. Safe Driving The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes. To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats. Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags. Side Curtain Airbag Storage ■ Operation The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact. Deployed Side Curtain Airbag Continued 59 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 60 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags ■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision. Safe Driving 60 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 61 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators Airbag System Indicators If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the multi-information display *. Models with information display ■ When the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly. Models with multi-information display 3 WARNING Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem. Safe Driving ■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator 1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 61 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 62 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators ■ Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ■ When the passenger front airbag off Safe Driving indicator comes on The indicator comes on to alert you that the passenger’s front airbag has been turned off. This occurs when the weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an infant or small child, on the seat. U.S. models 1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator If the indicator comes on with no front passenger and no objects on the passenger’s seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors, such as: • An object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket. • A child seat or other object pressing against the rear of the seat-back. • A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger’s seat. • The front seat or seat-back is forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it. • An object placed under the front passenger’s seat. If none of these conditions exist, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Canadian models Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat. 2 Child Safety P. 64 Objects placed on the seat can also cause the indicator to come on. If the front passenger’s seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and the indicator will not come on. 62 The passenger front airbag off indicator may come on and go off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 63 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAirbagsuAirbag Care Airbag Care You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations: We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit. Safe Driving ■ When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced. 1Airbag Care ■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash. ■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-8889-HONDA-9. 63 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 64 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under. Safe Driving To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle. Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: • An inflating front or side airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat. • A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver’s ability to safely control the vehicle. • Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat. 64 1Protecting Child Passengers 3 WARNING Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash. Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 65 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers • Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system. • Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries. • Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash. • Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments. • Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly. 3 WARNING Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death. Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked. Safe Driving • Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision. 1Protecting Child Passengers To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. To remind you of the passenger’s front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels. 2 Safety Labels P. 78 65 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 66 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Infants Safe Driving An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the infant is at least one year old. ■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position. 1Protecting Infants 3 WARNING Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash. Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front. Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a forward-facing position. Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions before installation. When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it. It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag system. 2 Airbags P. 50 If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat. 66 Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position: The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 67 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Protecting Smaller Children 1Protecting Smaller Children 3 WARNING Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates. If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child. Safe Driving If a child is at least one year old and has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat. ■ Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position. Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger’s front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child. Continued Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat. 67 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 68 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Selecting a Child Seat Safe Driving Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer’s use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety. In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual for proper installation instructions. ■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: • The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. • The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. • The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. 68 1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple. LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 69 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat Rigid Type 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object. 3 WARNING Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death. Safe Driving A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors. 1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks. Marks 2. Raise the head restraint to its highest position. For your child’s safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. Lower Anchors Continued 69 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 70 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children 1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat 3 WARNING Safe Driving Do not use the lower inner anchors of the outer rear seats to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat to the rear center seat, unless the manufacturer’s instructions for that system permit the use of inner anchors with the stated spacing. Flexible Type 4. Remove the cargo cover *. Anchor Tether Strap Hook 70 * Not available on all models 2 Cargo Cover P. 210 5. Route the tether strap between the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt. 8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 9. Reinstall the cargo cover *. Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCHcompatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 14.1 inches (357.8 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer’s instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 71 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants. Safe Driving A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat. 1. Raise the head restraint to its highest position. 2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 3. Route the seat belt through the child seat according to the seat manufacturer’s instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks. 4. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor. 5. Let the seat belt completely wind up into the retractor, then try to pull it out to make sure the retractor is locked. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 4 – 5. Continued 71 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 72 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children Safe Driving 6. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat. 7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt. 8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked. 72 1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 73 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Adding Security with a Tether A tether anchorage point is provided behind the rear outer seating positions and in the ceiling for the rear center. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security. Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats when using the seat belt or lower anchors. Safe Driving Tether Anchorage Points 1Adding Security with a Tether Tether Anchorage Point Continued 73 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 74 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children ■ Using an outer anchor Anchor 1. Remove the cargo cover *. 2 Cargo Cover P. 210 Safe Driving 2. Put the outer head restraint to its upper most position, then route the tether strap through the head restraint legs, and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 3. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 4. Reinstall the cargo cover *. Tether Strap Hook Anchor Anchor Cover 74 * Not available on all models ■ Using the center anchor 1. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position. 2. Open the anchor cover. 3. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted. 4. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 75 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children Safety of Larger Children ■ Protecting Larger Children 1Safety of Larger Children ■ Checking Seat Belt Fit When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions. ■ Checklist • Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat? • Does the shoulder belt cross between the child’s neck and arm? • Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs? • Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat. Continued 3 WARNING Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger’s front airbag inflates. If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed. Safe Driving The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front. 75 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 76 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children ■ Booster Seats 1Booster Seats Safe Driving If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in a rear seating position. For the child’s safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer’s recommendations. When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly. Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive. ■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: • Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information in this manual. • Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. • Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. • Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the seat. ■ Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly. 76 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 77 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior. • The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. • The exhaust system may have been damaged. • The vehicle is raised for an oil change. When you operate a vehicle with the tailgate open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the tailgate open, open all the windows and set the heating and cooling system */climate control system * as shown below. 1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting. 3 WARNING Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you. Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide. Safe Driving ■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever 1Carbon Monoxide Gas An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine. Adjust the heating and cooling system */climate control system * in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running. * Not available on all models 77 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 78 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Safety Labels Label Locations These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully. Safe Driving If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement. Sun Visor U.S. models Canadian models Dashboard U.S. models only Sun Visor U.S. models only Air Conditioner System U.S. models 78 Canadian models Radiator Cap 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 79 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Instrument Panel This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving. Indicators ............................................ 80 Information Display Warning and Information Messages * .................... 99 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * .................. 100 Gauges and Displays Gauges............................................ 113 Information Display * ........................ 115 Multi-Information Display *............... 118 * Not available on all models 79 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 80 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Indicators Indicator Name U.S. Canada Explanation • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Check the brake fluid level. you turn the ignition switch to ON 2 What to do when the indicator (w *1, then goes off. comes on while driving P. 601 • Comes on when the brake fluid • Comes on along with the ABS level is low. indicator - Have your vehicle checked by • Comes on if there is a problem a dealer. with the brake system. 2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Instrument Panel Brake System Indicator (Red) On/Blinking *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 80 * Not available on all models (Red) Comes On P. 601 Message * 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 81 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Canada Brake System Indicator (Amber) Explanation • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle you turn the ignition switch to ON checked by a dealer. (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system. • Comes on if there is a problem with an automatic brake hold system. Message * U.S. Canada Instrument Panel U.S. On/Blinking (Amber) *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 81 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 82 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel U.S. Canada Electric Parking Brake Indicator Electric Parking Brake System Indicator 82 On/Blinking Explanation Message * • Comes on for a few seconds when • Blinks and the electric parking brake you turn the ignition switch to ON system indicator comes on at the (w *1, then goes off if the parking same time - There is a problem with the brake has been released. electric parking brake system. The • Comes on when the parking brake parking brake may not be set. is applied, and goes off when it is released. • Comes on for about 15 seconds when you pull the electric parking brake switch while the ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1. • Stays on for about 15 seconds when you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 while the electric parking brake is set. • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Avoid using you turn the ignition switch to ON the parking brake and have your vehicle (w *1, then goes off. checked by a dealer immediately. 2 If the Electric Parking Brake System • Comes on if there is a problem Indicator Comes On P. 602 with the electric parking brake system. *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models U.S. Canada 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 83 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name U.S. Canada Automatic Brake Hold Indicator • Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on when the automatic brake hold system is on. • Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on when the automatic brake hold is activated. Explanation Message * 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 Instrument Panel Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator On/Blinking — *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 83 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 84 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message * • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Press the you turn the ignition switch to ON electric parking brake switch with the (w *1, then goes off. brake pedal depressed. Electric Parking Brake System Instrument Panel Brake Depressing Indicator * 2 Parking Brake P. 503 — • Comes on when the electric parking brake switch is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the electric parking brake is in operation. Automatic Brake Hold System ● • Comes on when the automatic brake hold button is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic brake hold is in operation. • Blinks if the automatic brake hold • is automatically canceled while it is in operation. The beeper sounds. Comes on while driving - Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 Immediately depress the brake pedal. *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 84 * Not available on all models — 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 85 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Low Oil Pressure Indicator On/Blinking Message * • Comes on while driving - Immediately stop in a safe place. 2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On P. 599 Instrument Panel • Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts. • Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. Explanation • Comes on when you turn the • Readiness codes are part of the on board ignition switch to ON (w *1, and diagnostics for the emissions control goes off either when the engine systems. starts or after several seconds if 2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 619 the engine did not start. If • Comes on while driving - Have your “readiness codes” have not been vehicle checked by a dealer. Malfunction set, it blinks five times before it • Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe Indicator Lamp goes off. place where there are no flammable • Comes on if there is a problem objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes with the emissions control system. or more, and wait for it to cool down. • Blinks when a misfire in the Then, take your vehicle to a dealer. engine’s cylinders is detected. 2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 600 Charging System Indicator • Comes on when you turn the • Comes on while driving - Turn off the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and heating and cooling system */climate goes off when the engine starts. control system * and rear defogger in • Comes on when the battery is not order to reduce electricity consumption. 2 If the Charging System Indicator charging. Comes On P. 599 *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 85 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 86 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Shift Lever Position Indicator Instrument Panel Transmission System Indicator On/Blinking • Indicates the current shift lever position. • Blinks if the transmission system has a problem. M (7-speed • Comes on when 7-speed manual manual shift shift mode is applied. mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator * Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Explanation 2 Shifting P. 440, 442 * Not available on all models — • Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. 2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 444 • Comes on and the beeper sounds • The beeper stops and the indicator goes if you are not wearing a seat belt off when you and the front passenger when you turn the ignition switch fasten their seat belts. to ON (w *1. • Stays on after you or the front • If the front passenger is not passenger has fastened the seat belt wearing a seat belt, the indicator - A detection error may have occurred in comes on a few seconds later. the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by • Blinks while driving if either you or a dealer. 2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 42 the front passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals. *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 86 Message * — 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 87 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle you turn the ignition switch to ON checked by a dealer. With this indicator (w *1, then goes off. on, your vehicle still has normal braking • If it comes on at any other time, ability but no anti-lock function. 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 508 there is a problem with the ABS. Supplemental Restraint System Indicator • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly or does not come you turn the ignition switch to ON on at all - Have your vehicle checked by (w *1, then goes off. a dealer. • Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner — Instrument Panel Low Fuel Indicator * • Comes on when the fuel reserve is • Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon running low (approximately 1.98 as possible. U.S. gal./7.5 Liter left). • Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a • Blinks if there is a problem with dealer. the fuel gauge. Message * *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 87 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 88 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel High Temperature Indicator (Red) On/Blinking Explanation • Comes on for a few seconds when • Goes off, then comes on in blue when you turn the ignition switch to ON the engine coolant temperature is low. (w *1, then goes off. • Blinks while driving - Drive slowly to • Blinks when the engine coolant prevent overheating. temperature goes up, and stays on • Stays on while driving - Immediately if the temperature continues to stop in a safe place and allow the engine rise. to cool. 2 Overheating P. 597 Low Temperature Indicator (Blue) Auto HighBeam Indicator * • Comes on while the engine coolant temperature is low, then goes off once the engine reaches normal operating temperature. • Comes on when all the operating conditions of the auto high-beam are met. • If the indicator stays on after the engine has reached normal operating temperature, there may be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. 2 Auto High-Beam * P. 176 *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 88 Message * * Not available on all models — — 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 89 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message * • Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) • OFF Indicator Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off. Comes on when you deactivate VSA®. 2 VSA® On and Off P. 451 • Comes on for a few seconds if you • Goes off when all doors and the tailgate turn the ignition switch to ON are closed. (w *1, then goes off. Door and • Comes on if any door or the Tailgate Open tailgate is not completely closed. Indicator * • The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if any door or the tailgate is opened while driving. Instrument Panel • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle you turn the ignition switch to ON checked by a dealer. Vehicle 2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka (w *1, then goes off. Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Stability • Blinks when VSA® is active. System P. 450 AssistTM (VSA®) • Comes on if there is a problem System with the VSA® system or hill start Indicator assist system. — — *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 89 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 90 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel • Electric Power Steering (EPS) System • Indicator U.S. models only On/Blinking Explanation Comes on when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, and goes off when the engine starts. Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system. • Stays on constantly or does not come on at all - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 601 • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe you turn the ignition switch to ON place, check tire pressures, and inflate (w *1, then goes off. the tire(s) if necessary. • May come on briefly if the ignition • Stays on after the tires are inflated to switch is turned to ON (w *1 and the recommended pressures - The the vehicle is not moved within 45 system needs to be calibrated. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 455 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete. • Comes on and stays on when: Low Tire - One or more tires’ pressures are Pressure/TPMS determined to be significantly Indicator low. - The system has not been calibrated. • Blinks for about one minute, and • Blinks and remains on - Have your then stays on if there is a problem vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle with the TPMS, or when a is fitted with a compact spare, get your compact spare tire is temporarily regular tire repaired or replaced and put installed. back on your vehicle as soon as you can. *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 90 * Not available on all models Message * 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 91 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message * System Message Indicator * • Comes on for a few seconds when • While the indicator is on, press the you turn the ignition switch to ON (information) button to see the message again. (w *1, then goes off. • Refer to the Indicators information in this • Comes on along with a beep chapter when a system message appears when a problem is detected. A on the multi-information display. Take system message on the multithe appropriate action for the message. information display appears at the • The multi-information display does not same time. return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the button is pressed. — Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators • Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever. • Blink if you press the hazard warning button. — High Beam Indicator • Comes on when the high beam headlights are on. • Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A turn signal light bulb has blown. Change the bulb immediately. Instrument Panel Smart Entry System Indicator * • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly or does not come you set the power mode to ON, on at all - Have your vehicle checked by then goes off. a dealer. • Comes on as soon as a problem is detected in the smart entry system or push button starting system. 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 543, 546, 547 — — *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 91 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 92 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Lights On Indicator Instrument Panel Fog Light Indicator * On/Blinking • Comes on whenever the light switch is on, or in AUTO * when the exterior lights are on. — * Not available on all models — • Blinks Models without smart entry system You cannot start the engine. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , pull the key out, and then insert the key and turn it to ON (w again. Models with smart entry system You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again. • Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. • Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur. *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 92 Message * • If you remove the key from the ignition switch *, or set the power mode * to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the exterior lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. • Comes on when the fog lights are on. • Comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information. Immobilizer System Indicator Explanation — 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 93 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name ECON Mode Indicator On/Blinking Message * 2 ECON Button P. 446 Instrument Panel • Comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on when you press the ECON button. Explanation • Blinks when the security system alarm has been set. Indicator Security System Alarm Indicator 2 Security System Alarm P. 159 — CRUISE MAIN • Comes on when you press the CRUISE button. Indicator * 2 Cruise Control * P. 447 — CRUISE CONTROL Indicator * • Comes on if you have set a speed for cruise control. 2 Cruise Control * P. 447 — Maintenance Minder Indicator * • Comes on when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 521 — Indicator *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 93 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 94 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Instrument Panel All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System Indicator * On/Blinking Explanation • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - the engine drives you turn the ignition switch to ON only the front wheels in this state. Have (w *1, then goes off. your vehicle checked by a dealer. • Comes on if there is a problem • Blinks while driving - the engine drives with the AWD. only the front wheels in this state. Stop in • Blinks when the AWD system is a safe place, shift to (P , and idle the engine until the indicator goes off. If the overheated. The system is inactive. indicator does not stop blinking, take your vehicle to a dealer. 2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM * P. 454 *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 94 * Not available on all models Message * 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 95 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Message * • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle you turn the ignition switch to ON checked by a dealer. (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on if there is a problem with the RDM system. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator * Instrument Panel • Comes on when the RDM system shuts itself off. • Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 • Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message come back on after you cleaned the area around the camera. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 • Comes on if anything covers the • When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using radar sensor cover and prevents a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to the sensor from detecting a go off after the radar sensor is cleaned. vehicle in front. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if • May come on when driving in bad the indicator does not go off even after you clean the sensor cover. weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) 2 Radar Sensor P. 502 *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 95 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 96 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking Explanation Instrument Panel Adaptive • Comes on for a few seconds when • Comes on while driving - Have your Cruise Control you turn the ignition switch to ON vehicle checked by a dealer. (w *1, then goes off. (ACC) • Comes on if there is a problem Indicator with ACC. (Amber) * Adaptive • Comes on when you press the Cruise Control MAIN button. (ACC) Indicator (Green) * 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 473 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber) * • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle you turn the ignition switch to ON checked by a dealer. (w *1, then goes off. • Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS. Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Green) * • Comes on when you press the MAIN button. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486 *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 96 Message * * Not available on all models — — 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 97 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name Explanation Message * • Comes on for a few seconds when • Stays on constantly without the you turn the ignition switch to ON CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked *1 (w , then goes off. by a dealer. 2 Collision Mitigation Braking • Comes on when you deactivate SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 463 the CMBSTM. A multi-information display message appears for five seconds. • Comes on if there is a problem with the CMBSTM. Instrument Panel Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator * On/Blinking *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 97 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 98 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsu Indicator Name On/Blinking • Comes on when the CMBSTM system shuts itself off. Explanation • Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. Instrument Panel 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Indicator * • When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. Indicator may take some time to go off after the radar sensor is cleaned. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover. 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 463 2 Radar Sensor P. 502 • Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 98 * Not available on all models Message * 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 99 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages * Information Display Warning and Information Messages * The following messages appear only on the information display. Message Condition Explanation • Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed. • Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on • Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked the battery. by a dealer. * Not available on all models Instrument Panel 2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 600 99 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 100 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * The following messages appear only on the multi-information display. Press the with the system message indicator on. Message Condition (information) button to see the message again Explanation • Appears when the fuel fill cap is loose or is not installed. Instrument Panel 2 Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message P. 600 • Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due soon. u Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and Maintenance Past Due follow. Canadian models • Appears when the washer fluid is low. 2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the MultiInformation Display P. 526 • Refill the washer fluid. 2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 540 • Appears while you are customizing the settings and the shift lever is moved out of (P . 2 Customized Features P. 123 100 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 101 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Explanation • Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically • Immediately depress the brake pedal. canceled while it is in operation. Instrument Panel • Appears when the automatic brake hold system is turned off. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 • Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt. • Fasten the driver’s seat belt. • Appears when the automatic brake hold button is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the automatic brake hold is in operation. • Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed. 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 Continued 101 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 102 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition • Appears when the parking brake is applied automatically while it is in operation. Instrument Panel 102 • Appears when the electric parking brake switch is pressed without depressing the brake pedal while the electric parking brake is in operation. Explanation 2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 506 2 Parking Brake P. 503 • Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed. 2 Parking Brake P. 503 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 103 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Models without smart entry system Message Condition • Appears when the ignition key is turned to ACCESSORY (q from ON (w . (The driver’s door is closed.) Explanation — Instrument Panel • Appears when you open the driver’s door while the • Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q . key. • Appears when you open the driver’s door while the • Remove the key from the ignition switch. ignition key is in LOCK (0 . Continued 103 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 104 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Models with smart entry system Message Condition Explanation • Appears after you unlock and open the driver’s door. 2 Starting the Engine P. 435 Instrument Panel Canadian models • Appears when the steering wheel is locked. • Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button. • Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP • Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes button to turn the engine off without the shift lever to VEHICLE OFF. in (P . • Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY. — 104 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 105 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Models with smart entry system Message Condition Explanation • Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the • Change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button P. 166 power mode is in ACCESSORY. • Goes off when you bring the smart entry remote back inside the vehicle and close the door. • Appears when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak. • Replace the battery as soon as possible. • Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too weak to start the engine or the key is not within operating range to start the engine. A beeper sounds six times. • Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE START/STOP button to be touched with. 2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 168 Instrument Panel • Appears when you close the door with the power mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside the vehicle. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 568 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 592 Continued 105 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 106 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Explanation • Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Checking the Battery P. 566 the battery. Instrument Panel U.S. models Canadian models 106 • Appears when the starter system has a problem. • As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal, and manually start the engine. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 107 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition • Appears for about three seconds when ACC has been automatically canceled. Explanation • You can resume the set speed after the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves. Press the RES/+ button. 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 473 2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) P. 473 2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 463 Instrument Panel • Flashes when the system senses a likely collision with • Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply a vehicle in front of you. the brakes, change lanes, etc.). • Appears when the LKAS is in operation, or the LKAS • If any other system indicators come on, such as the button is pressed, but there is a problem with a VSA®, ABS and brake system, take appropriate action. 2 Indicators P. 80 system related to the LKAS. The LKAS cancels automatically. The beeper sounds simultaneously. • Appears when the camera has been cooled down and LKAS is available. • Pressing the MAIN/LKAS button can resume the system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 Continued 107 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 108 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Explanation Instrument Panel • Appears if there is a problem with the auto highbeam. • Manually operate the headlight switch. • If you are driving with the high beam headlights when this happens, the headlights are changed to low beams. • Appears if anything covers the radar sensor cover and prevents the sensor from detecting a vehicle in front. • May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.) • When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off dirt using a soft cloth. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message does not disappear even after you clean the sensor cover. 2 Radar Sensor P. 502 2 Honda Sensing® * P. 460 • Appears if the temperature inside the front sensor camera is too high and some driver assist systems cannot be activated. • Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. • Disappears - The camera has been cooled down and the systems are activated normally. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 2 Honda Sensing® * P. 460 • Appears if the area around the front sensor camera • When the front window gets dirty, stop your vehicle in is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. and be prevented from a safe place, and wipe it off with a soft cloth. detecting a vehicle in front. • Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the message • May appear when driving in bad weather (rain, does not disappear even after you cleaned the area snow, fog, etc.) around the camera. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 2 Honda Sensing® * P. 460 108 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 109 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) • Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly. When you selected Warning Only - The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. • Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 486 • Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving. 2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System P. 495 • You can change the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Narrow, Normal, Wide, and Warning Only can be selected. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Instrument Panel Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System • Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected line. Explanation When you selected Narrow, Normal or Wide - The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system also steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane. Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System When you selected Narrow • Appears when the vehicle is likely to drive out of a detected line. - The system steers the vehicle to help you remain within your driving lane. — • Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper • Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS. sounds simultaneously. Continued 109 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 110 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Explanation • Appears if not wearing a seat belt when you set the • Goes off after you or the front passenger or both of power mode to ON. you have fastened your seat belts. Instrument Panel 110 • Appears if there is a problem with the fuel gauge. • Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. • Appears when the fuel reserve is running low (approximately 1.98 U.S. gal./7.5 Liter left). • Appears - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 117 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 111 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Explanation • Goes off when all doors are closed. • Appears if the tailgate is not completely closed. • Goes off when the tailgate is closed. Instrument Panel • Appears if any door is not completely closed. • The beeper sounds and the message appears on if any door or the tailgate is opened while driving. • Appears if any door or the tailgate is not completely • Goes off when all doors and the tailgate are closed. closed. Continued 111 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 112 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicatorsuMulti-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * Message Condition Explanation • Appears when ECON mode is turned off by pressing ECON button. 2 ECON Button P. 446 Instrument Panel Models with navigation system • Appears when approaching a intersection during route guidance. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual • Appears when set the power mode to ON while driving. 2 Emergency Engine Stop P. 593 • Appears if there is a problem with the automatic lighting control system. Models with LED headlights • Appears if there is a problem with the headlights. 112 • Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. • Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on. When conditions allow you to drive safety, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 113 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Gauges and Displays Gauges Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer and related indicators. They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. ■ Changing the color of the meter Models with information display Models with multi-information display Instrument Panel You can change the color of the meter. Press the (select/reset) knob when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1 and the ambient meter is lit up. Each time you press the knob, the color changes. The colors change in the following order: white  blue  purple  pink  red  amber  yellow You can change the white to some colors. 2 Customized Features P. 123 *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 113 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 114 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuGauges ■ Speedometer Displays your driving speed in mph and km/h. ■ Tachometer Instrument Panel Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute. ■ Outside Temperature Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada). ■ Adjusting the outside temperature display Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h). It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized. Use the multi-information display's customized features to correct the temperature. 2 Customized Features P. 123 114 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 115 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display * Information Display * 1Switching the Display The information display shows the fuel gauge, odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and maintenance service item codes, and other gauges. ■ Switching the Display Models with display audio system Some of the items on the information display also appear on the audio/information screen. They also change along with the information display changes while the fuel consumption is shown. Select/Reset Knob Instant Fuel Economy Clock Odometer Trip Meter A Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge * Not available on all models Instant Fuel Economy Clock Range Trip Meter A Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge Instant Fuel Economy Clock Average Fuel Economy A Trip Meter A Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge Continued Instant Fuel Economy Clock Average Fuel Economy B Trip Meter B Outside Temperature Fuel Gauge Instrument Panel Press the (select/reset) knob to change the display. Each time you press the (select/reset) knob, the information display changes as follows: Instant Fuel Economy Clock Engine Oil Life Fuel Gauge 115 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 116 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display * ■ Instant Fuel Economy 1Trip Meter Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the knob. Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg. ■ Odometer Instrument Panel Shows the total number of miles that your vehicle has accumulated. ■ Trip Meter Shows the total number of miles driven since the last reset. TRIP A and B can be used to measure two separate trips. ■ Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the reset to 0.0. knob. The trip meter is ■ Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your trips in the past. ■ Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset. 116 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 117 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display * ■ Outside Temperature Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit. The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h). It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized. When the engine oil life is shown on the information display, you cannot adjust the outside temperature. Push the knob to select the other display. Instrument Panel ■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F if the temperature reading seems incorrect. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Press and hold the (select/reset) knob for 10 seconds or more while the outside temperature is shown on the information display. u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display starts showing from -5°F to +5°F. 3. Release the knob when the right adjustment amount is shown. u The adjustment is complete. 1Outside Temperature ■ Engine Oil Life and Maintenance Items Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 521 ■ Fuel Gauge Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. 1Fuel Gauge NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter. The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading. 117 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 118 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * Multi-Information Display * The multi-information display shows the odometer, trip meter, and other gauges. It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information. ■ Switching the Display ■ Main displays Instrument Panel Press the (information) button to change the display. Range/Average Fuel/Instant Fuel Blank Screen User Customize Compass * Button Average Speed/ Elapsed Time Turn By Turn Screen 118 * Not available on all models AWD Torque Distribution Monitor * Engine Oil Life 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 119 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Lower displays Press the SEL/RESET button or (select/reset) knob to change the display. (Select/Reset) Knob Instrument Panel Fuel Gauge / Odometer Fuel Gauge / Trip Meter A Fuel Gauge / Trip Meter B SEL/RESET Button Continued 119 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 120 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Odometer 1Trip Meter Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) that your vehicle has accumulated. Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by pressing the SEL/RESET button. ■ Trip Meter Instrument Panel Shows the total number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips. ■ Resetting a trip meter To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the SEL/RESET button. The trip meter is reset to 0.0. ■ Fuel Gauge 1Fuel Gauge Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank. Low Fuel Indicator Icon Fuel Gauge ■ Fuel Low warning When the remaining fuel is running low, the display color will change to orange and warns you to refuel as soon as possible. The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading. The icon will start to blink when the fuel gauge is malfunctioning. 2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * P. 100 120 * Not available on all models NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 121 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Average Fuel Economy 1Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset. You can change when to reset the average fuel economy. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips. ■ Elapsed Time 1Elapsed Time You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset. ■ Average Speed Instrument Panel ■ Range 1Average Speed Shows the average speed in mph (U.S.) or km/h (Canada) since Trip A or Trip B was reset. You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 123 ■ Instant Fuel Economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada). ■ Engine Oil Life Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM. 2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 521 Continued 121 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 122 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Navigation 1Navigation You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance. 2 Customized Features P. 123 ■ Compass * Shows the compass screen. ■ Turn-by-Turn Directions Instrument Panel When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system * or Android Auto, turnby-turn directions to your destination appear. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 2 Android AutoTM P. 316 ■ AWD Torque Distribution Monitor * The indicators on the display show the amount of torque being transferred to the right front, left front, right rear, and left rear wheels. 2 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM * P. 454 122 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 123 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Customized Features 1Customized Features Use the multi-information display to customize certain features. When you customize settings, shift to (P . Instrument Panel ■ How to customize Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the button while the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift lever is in (P . Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customizing mode. To customize other features, press the button. 2 List of customizable options P. 126 2 Example of customization settings P. 130 Multi-Information Display: Goes to Vehicle Settings. Button: Changes the customize menus and items. SEL/RESET Button: Enters the selected item. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 123 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 124 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Customization flow Press the button. Vehicle Settings SEL/RESET TPMS Calibration * Instrument Panel Forward Collision Warning Distance 4 ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Driver Assist System Setup SEL/RESET 4 Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep 4 Meter Setup SEL/RESET 4 SEL/RESET 4 4 Keyless Access Setup * Language Selection Adjust Outside Temp. Display “Trip A” Reset Timing “Trip B” Reset Timing Fuel Efficiency Backlight Color Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turn By Turn Auto Display Speed/Distance Units Door Unlock Mode SEL/RESET 4 Keyless Access Light Flash Keyless Access Beep 4 124 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 125 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * Interior Light Dimming Time 4 Lighting Setup SEL/RESET 4 Headlight Auto OFF Timer Auto Door Lock 4 Auto Door Unlock Door Setup Key And Remote Unlock Mode SEL/RESET 4 Walk Away Auto Lock * Instrument Panel Auto Light Sensitivity * Keyless Lock Answer Back Security Relock Timer 4 Cancel 4 Maintenance Info. SEL/RESET 4 Reset 4 Default All 4 SEL/RESET * Not available on all models Exit Continued 125 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 126 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features TPMS Calibration * — Instrument Panel Driver Assist System Setup Selectable Settings Calibrates the TPMS. Cancel/Calibrate Forward Collision Warning Distance Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts. Long/Normal*1/Short ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range. ON/OFF*1 Road Departure Mitigation Setting Changes the setting for the road departure mitigation system. Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF*1 *1: Default Setting 126 Description * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 127 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings Changes the displayed language. English*1/Français/Español Adjust Outside Temp. Display Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees. -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada) “Trip A” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A. When Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1 “Trip B” Reset Timing Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B. When Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1 Fuel Efficiency Backlight Color Changes the ambient meter color. White*1/Blue/Violet/Pink/ Red/Amber/Yellow/Random Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off. ON*1/OFF Turn By Turn Auto Display Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes on during the route guidance. ON*1/OFF Speed/Distance Units Selects the trip computer units. mph∙miles*1/km/h∙km (U.S.) mph∙miles/km/h∙km*1 (Canada) Meter Setup Instrument Panel Language Selection *1:Default Setting Continued 127 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 128 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * Setup Group Instrument Panel Keyless Access Setup * Lighting Setup Customizable Features Selectable Settings Door Unlock Mode Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver’s door handle. Driver Door Only*1/All Doors Keyless Access Light Flash Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors. ON*1/OFF Keyless Access Beep Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors. ON*1/OFF Interior Light Dimming Time Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. 60sec/30sec*1/15sec Headlight Auto OFF Timer Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver’s door. 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec Auto Light Sensitivity * Changes the timing for the headlights to come on. Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min *1:Default Setting 128 Description * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 129 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * Setup Group Customizable Features Selectable Settings With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift From P/OFF Auto Door Unlock Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock. All Doors When Driver's Door Opens*1/ All Doors When Shifted To Park/ All Doors When Ignition Switched OFF/ OFF Key And Remote Unlock Mode Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote or built-in key. Driver Door*1/All Doors Walk Away Auto Lock * Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle. ON/OFF*1 Keyless Lock Answer Back LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds. ON*1/OFF Security Relock Timer Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock the vehicle without opening any door. 90sec/60sec/30sec*1 Maintenance Info. — Resets or cancels the engine oil life display when you have performed the maintenance service. Cancel/Reset Default All — Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as default. Cancel/Set Instrument Panel Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock. Auto Door Lock Door Setup Description *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 129 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 130 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * ■ Example of customization settings The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset. 1. Press the button until Vehicle Settings appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button. Instrument Panel 2. Press the button until Meter Setup appears on the display. 3. Press the SEL/RESET button. 130 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 131 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGauges and DisplaysuMulti-Information Display * 5. Press the button and select When Refueled, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The When Refueled Setup screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen. Instrument Panel 4. Press the button until “Trip A” Reset Timing appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When Refueled, IGN OFF, Manually Reset, or Exit. 6. Press the button until Exit appears on the display, then press the SEL/RESET button. 7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen. 131 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 132 132 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 133 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Controls This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving. Clock.................................................................. 134 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key................................................................. 136 Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * ...... 138 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ... 139 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside.. 148 Childproof Door Locks.................................... 151 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking......................... 152 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * ....................................................... 153 Tailgate ............................................................. 156 Opening/Closing the Tailgate.......................... 157 Security System Immobilizer System......................................... 159 Security System Alarm .................................... 159 Opening and Closing the Windows................ 162 Moonroof * ........................................................ 164 * Not available on all models Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Models without smart entry system Ignition Switch ............................................... 165 Models with smart entry system ENGINE START/STOP Button ........................... 166 Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison .....169 Turn Signals ................................................... 170 Light Switches ................................................ 171 Fog Lights * ..................................................... 174 Daytime Running Lights.................................. 175 Auto High-Beam * ........................................... 176 Wipers and Washers....................................... 179 Defogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield * .....182 Brightness Control.......................................... 184 Adjusting the Steering Wheel ......................... 186 Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror.................................. 187 Power Door Mirrors........................................ 189 Adjusting the Seats Front Seats ..................................................... 190 Rear Seats ...................................................... 193 Maintain a Proper Sitting Position................... 196 Head Restraints .............................................. 197 Armrest.......................................................... 200 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items Interior Lights ................................................. 201 Interior Convenience Items ............................. 203 Heating and Cooling System * Using Vents, Heating and A/C ........................ 212 Climate Control System * Using Automatic Climate Control ................... 216 Automatic Climate Control Sensors ................ 225 133 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 134 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Clock Adjusting the Clock Models without navigation system 1Adjusting the Time You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. ■ Adjusting the Time Models with display audio system The clock in the multi-information display */ information display * is automatically adjusted along with the audio system’s clock display. Models with navigation system ■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen Controls 1. Select the (HOME) icon, then select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info, then Clock Adjustment. 3. Adjust the hours and minutes by selecting 3/4. 4. Select OK to set the time. The clock is automatically updated through the navigation system, so the time does not need to be adjusted. Models without navigation system You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock. 2 Customized Features P. 352 Models with display audio system You can turn the clock display on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 352 *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 134 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 135 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClockuAdjusting the Clock Models with color audio system 1Adjusting the Time ■ Using the MENU/CLOCK button Models with color audio system 1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button. u Adjust Clock is selected. 2. Rotate to change hour, then press . 3. Rotate to change minute, then press . 4. To enter the selection, rotate and select Set, then press . These indications are used to show how to operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter. You can also select Adjust Clock by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Adjust Clock, then press . Controls 135 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 136 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Locking and Unlocking the Doors Key This vehicle comes with the following keys: Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and Smart Entry to lock and unlock all the doors and tailgate. Remote * All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft. 2 Immobilizer System P. 159 Controls Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the keys: • Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in locations with high temperature or high humidity. • Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. • Keep the keys away from liquids, dust and sand. • Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the battery. If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter/smart entry system * may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer. Ignition Key with Remote Transmitter * ■ Built-in Key * Release Knob Built-in Key 136 1Key * Not available on all models The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors when the smart entry remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled. To remove the built-in key, slide the release knob and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the smart entry remote until it clicks. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 137 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey ■ Key Number Tag 1Key Number Tag Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key. Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer. If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer. Controls 137 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 138 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/ unlocking the doors and tailgate, or to start the engine. In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: • Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. • You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. • A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote. Controls 138 * Not available on all models 1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * Communication between the smart entry remote and the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 139 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * When you carry the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate. You can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door or tailgate outer handle. 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior light comes on when you unlock the doors and tailgate. No doors opened: The light fades out after 30 seconds. Doors and tailgate relocked: The light goes off immediately. 2 Interior Lights P. 201 If you do not open a door or the tailgate within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system, the doors and tailgate will automatically relock. Controls 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF. • Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you. • Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range. • The door may be unlocked if the door handle is covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the smart entry remote is within range. * Not available on all models Continued 139 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 140 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Door Lock Button ■ Locking the doors and tailgate Press the door lock button on the front door or the tailgate. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all the doors and tailgate lock; and the security system sets. 1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System * • If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the • • Controls • • Lock Button 140 * Not available on all models door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors. After locking the door, wait at least two seconds before unlocking it by gripping the handle. The door might not open if you pull it immediately after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle. Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not be able to lock/unlock the doors and the tailgate with the smart entry remote if it is above or below the outside handle. The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too close to the door and door glass. The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the multi-information display. 2 Customized Features P. 123 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 141 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside Controls ■ Unlocking the doors and tailgate Grab the driver’s door handle: u The driver’s door unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Grab the front passenger’s door handle: u All the doors and the tailgate unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. Press the tailgate release button: u The tailgate unlocks. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds twice. 2 Opening/Closing the Tailgate P. 157 Tailgate Release Button Continued 141 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 142 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk Controls The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m) 1 away auto lock®) When you walk away from the vehicle while carrying the smart entry remote, the doors and tailgate will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors and tailgate are closed, and the smart entry remote is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle. Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry remote and close door(s) and tailgate. 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock function will be activated. 2. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper sounds; all doors and tailgate will then lock. 1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the multi-information display. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the multi-information display, only the remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver’s door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock. 2 Customized Features P. 123 After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the smart entry remote will continue to flash until the doors and tailgate are locked. When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors and tailgate will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds. When you open a door or tailgate after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors and tailgate are closed. Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock function will not activate: • The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. uThe beeper will not sound. • The remote is taken out of its operational range before all the doors are closed. uThe beeper will sound. 142 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 143 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the driver’s door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate the lock as follows: LockUnlockLockUnlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is deactivated. Continued The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met. • The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. • A door, tailgate or the hood is not closed. • The power mode is set to any mode other than OFF. • The smart entry remote is not located within a radius of about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors and tailgate. Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases. • The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle through a window. • You are located too close to the vehicle. • The smart entry remote is put inside the tailgate. If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once. Controls To restore the function: • Set the power mode to ON. • Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock function • With the smart entry remote on you, move out of the auto lock function operation range. • Open any door. 1Locking the doors and tailgate (Walk away auto lock®) 143 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 144 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Using the Remote Transmitter Unlock Button Lock Button LED Controls LED Unlock Button Lock Button ■ Locking the doors Press the lock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and tailgate lock, and the security system sets. Twice (within five seconds after the first push): u A beeper sounds and verifies the security system is set. 1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock. Models with multi-information display You can change the relock timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 123 The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings. The remote transmitter will not lock the vehicle when a door is open. Models without smart entry system The remote transmitter will not work when the key is in the ignition switch. Models with smart entry system You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter or smart entry system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF. 144 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 145 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once: u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door unlocks. Twice: u The remaining doors and the tailgate unlock. 1Using the Remote Transmitter If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead. 2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 568 Models with multi-information display You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Controls Continued 145 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 146 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key If the lock or unlock button of the remote does not work, use the key instead. If the lock or unlock button of the remote does not work, use the key instead. Fully insert the key and turn it. Controls 146 Lock 1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key If you unlock the doors with the key, the alarm activates when you open the hood or move the shift lever out of (P . When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. When unlocking, the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors and the tailgate. Unlock Models with multi-information display You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Customized Features P. 123 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 147 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it. ■ Locking the driver’s door Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door. When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors and tailgate lock at the same time. Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle. Controls ■ Locking the passengers’ doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door. 1Locking a Door Without Using a Key ■ Lockout prevention system Models without smart entry system The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch. Models with smart entry system The doors and the tailgate cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. 147 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 148 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Using the Lock Tab To lock Lock Tab 1Using the Lock Tab ■ Locking a door Push the lock tab forward. ■ Unlocking a door To unlock Controls 148 Pull the lock tab rearward. When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, all of the other doors and the tailgate lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 149 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle 1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one motion. The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion. Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided. 2 Childproof Door Locks P. 151 Inner Handle Controls Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors. To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door. u This setting works for one time only. Models with multi-information display If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to OFF using the multi-information display. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Models without multi-information display If you do not want all the doors to unlock all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the master door lock switch. 2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * P. 153 * Not available on all models Continued 149 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 150 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all the doors and the tailgate. To lock Controls 150 To unlock Master Door Lock Switch 1Using the Master Door Lock Switch When you lock/unlock the driver’s door using the master door lock switch, all the other doors and the tailgate lock/unlock at the same time. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 151 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks Childproof Door Locks The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. ■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door. Unlock To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle. Controls Lock ■ When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle. 1Childproof Door Locks 151 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 152 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met. ■ Auto Door Locking ■ Drive lock mode 1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock switch. 2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/ Unlocking Setting * P. 153 All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). Models with multi-information display ■ Auto Door Unlocking Controls ■ Driver’s door open mode 152 * Not available on all models All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened. You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the multi-information display. 2 Customized Features P. 123 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 153 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch. ■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options ■ Auto door locking Mode Description All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h). Off The auto door locking is deactivated all the time. Controls Drive Lock Mode*1 ■ Auto door unlocking Mode Description Driver’s Door Open Mode*1 All doors and the tailgate unlock when the driver’s door is opened. Park Unlock Mode All doors unlock when the transmission is put into (P with the brake pedal depressed. Off The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time. *1:Default setting * Not available on all models Continued 153 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 154 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * ■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options Steps Drive Lock Mode*1 1 Apply the parking brake. 2 The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . Off Open the driver’s door. *2 Controls Press and hold the front of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed. Release the switch. 4 5 Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2. u Customization is completed. u All doors unlock and all turn signals blink three times. *1:Default setting *2:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 154 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 155 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting * ■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options Steps Driver Door Open Unlock Mode*1 Park Unlock Mode Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever out of (P with the brake pedal depressed. 2 The driver’s door must be closed at this stage. 3 Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to (P . Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to (P . Open the driver’s door. Press and hold the rear of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door. You will hear a click more than five seconds elapsed. Release the switch. Controls 1 Off 4 5 Turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 within 20 seconds*2. u Customization is completed. u All doors lock and all turn signals blink three times. *1:Default setting *2:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 155 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 156 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Tailgate Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate Always make sure individuals and objects are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. • Open the tailgate all the way. u If it is not fully opened, the tailgate may begin to close under its own weight. • Be careful when it is windy. The wind may cause the tailgate to close. Keep the tailgate closed while driving to: u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle. 1Precautions for Opening/Closing the Tailgate 3 WARNING Anyone caught in the path of a tailgate that is being opened or closed can be seriously injured. Make sure that all people are clear of the tailgate before opening or closing it. 2 Carbon Monoxide Gas P. 77 Controls Be careful not to hit your head on the tailgate or to put your hands between the tailgate and the cargo area when closing the tailgate. When you are storing or picking up luggage from the cargo area while the engine is idling, do not stand in front of the exhaust pipe. You may get burned. Do not allow any passenger in the cargo space. They may get hurt during hard braking, a sudden acceleration, or a crash. 156 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 157 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate Opening/Closing the Tailgate Tailgate Release Button When all the doors are unlocked or press the tailgate unlock button on the remote transmitter, the tailgate is unlocked. Press the tailgate release button and lift open the tailgate. Inner Handle Models with smart entry system • Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle when you get out. Carry it with you. • Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote, you can unlock the tailgate while someone else with the remote is within range. • Do not leave the smart entry remote inside the cargo area and close the tailgate. The beeper sounds and the tailgate cannot be closed. If you are carrying the smart entry remote, you do not have to unlock the tailgate before opening it. Controls To close the tailgate, grab the inner handle, pull the tailgate down, and push it closed from outside. 1Opening/Closing the Tailgate If you close the tailgate when all the doors are locked, the tailgate locks automatically. u Some exterior lights flash. Continued 157 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 158 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuTailgateuOpening/Closing the Tailgate ■ Using the Remote Transmitter Press the tailgate unlock button to unlock the tailgate. Controls Tailgate Unlock Button Tailgate Unlock Button 158 1Using the Remote Transmitter If you have unlocked and opened the tailgate using the remote transmitter or smart entry remote, when closing, the tailgate locks automatically. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 159 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Security System Immobilizer System The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic signals to verify the key. NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended. Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. Controls Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: • Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button. • Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. • Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button. • Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic device, such as televisions and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic. 1Immobilizer System Security System Alarm The security system alarm activates when the tailgate, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the tailgate or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or smart entry system *. However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the transmission is taken out of (P or the hood is opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. 1Security System Alarm The security alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates. ■ When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently and all of the exterior lights flash. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 159 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 160 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the remote transmitter or smart entry remote *, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated. ■ Setting the security system alarm Controls The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: • The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1. • The hood is closed. • All doors and the tailgate are locked from outside with the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system *. Models without smart entry system • The key has been removed from the ignition switch. ■ When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set. ■ To cancel the security system alarm The security system alarm is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or smart entry system *, or when the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 160 * Not available on all models 1Security System Alarm Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when: • Unlocking the door with the lock tab. • Opening the hood with the hood release handle. • Moving the shift lever out of (P . If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may activate once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the key, remote transmitter, or smart entry system *. Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 161 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm ■ Panic Mode ■ The panic button on the remote transmitter If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: • The horn sounds. • Some exterior lights flash. ■ Canceling panic mode • Press any button on the remote transmitter. • Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. Controls Panic Button *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 161 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 162 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Opening and Closing the Windows Opening/Closing the Power Windows The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to open and close all of the windows. The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (not pushed in, indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat. Controls When the power window lock button is pushed in, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle. ■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function Driver’s Window Switch On Off Indicator Power Window Lock Button ■ Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly. The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly. ■ Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 162 1Opening/Closing the Power Windows 3 WARNING Closing a power window on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them. The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Opening either front door cancels this function. Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction. The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch. The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 163 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows ■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up. Close Open Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position. Controls 163 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 164 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Moonroof * Opening/Closing the Moonroof You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof. ■ Using the Moonroof Switch ■ Automatic operation Open Controls Close Tilt To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly. The moonroof will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, touch the switch briefly. ■ Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. ■ Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release. 164 * Not available on all models 1Opening/Closing the Moonroof 3 WARNING Opening or closing the moonroof on someone’s hands or fingers can cause serious injury. Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it. NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor. The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function. When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 165 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel Models without smart entry system Ignition Switch 1Ignition Switch You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is in (P . (0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this position. (q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position. (w ON: This is the position when driving. Models with multi-information display When the warning buzzer sounds, the following messages appear on the multi-information display: • In LOCK (0 : the symbol with an Remove Key From Ignition • In ACCESSORY (q : the symbol with a Return Ignition Switch To Lock (0) Position Controls (e START: This position is for starting the engine. The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of the key. If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK (0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound to remind you to take the key out. If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY (q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the key to turn. 165 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 166 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button Models with smart entry system ENGINE START/STOP Button 1ENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Changing the Power Mode ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle. Continuously Variable Transmission *2 VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The steering wheel is locked*1. The power to all electrical components is turned off. Controls ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position. ON The button blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used. Without pressing the brake pedal Press the button without the transmission in (P . Press the button with the transmission in (P . *1: Canadian models *2: U.S. models 166 Press the button. Put the transmission into (P *2. Operating Range If the battery of the smart entry remote is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 592 The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle. ON mode: The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the engine is running. Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 167 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Automatic Power Off 1Changing the Power Mode If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery. When in this mode: Canadian models If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP button while moving the steering wheel left and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the mode to change. Canadian models The steering wheel does not lock. Controls All models You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry system. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). 2 Changing the Power Mode P. 166 Continued 167 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 168 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button ■ Power Mode Reminder If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, a warning buzzer sounds. ■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder Controls When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the smart entry remote from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the smart entry remote in another location. ■ When the power mode is in ACCESSORY The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle. ■ When the power mode is in ON An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel. 168 1Smart Entry Remote Reminder When the smart entry remote is within the system’s operational range, and all the doors are closed, the warning function cancels. If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/STOP button. Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer. Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to activate. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the warning buzzer may also activate even if the remote is within the system’s operational range. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 169 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison Ignition Switch Position LOCK (0 (with/without the key) ACCESSORY (q ON (w START (e • Use this position to start the engine. • The ignition switch returns to the ON (w position when you release the key. Power Mode START VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) ACCESSORY ON Button is: Blinking With Smart Entry Button-Off Button-Blinking System and ENGINE • Engine is turned off and • Engine is turned off. START/STOP power is shut down. • Some electrical Button • The steering wheel is components such as the locked*1. audio system and the • No electrical accessory power socket components can be can be operated. used. Controls Without Smart Entry • Engine is turned off and • Engine is turned off. • Normal key position System power is shut down. • Some electrical while driving. • The steering wheel is components such as the • All electrical locked. audio system and the components can be • No electrical accessory power socket used. components can be can be operated. used. On ButtonBlinking (engine is turned off) On (engine is running) • All electrical components can be used. Button-On • The mode automatically returns to ON after the engine starts. *1 : Canadian models 169 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 170 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals Turn Signals (A) (B) The turn signals can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. ■ (A): Turn signal When turning the car, push the lever up or down based on the direction you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink. (B) ■ (B): One-touch turn signal Controls (A) When you lightly push the lever up or down and release it, the turn signal will blink 3 times. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 170 1Turn Signals The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will blink when the external turn signal blinks. 2 Indicators P. 80 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 171 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches Light Switches ■ Manual Operation U.S. models High Beams 1Light Switches Models without smart entry system Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting or position of the ignition switch. If you remove the key from the ignition switch while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. ■ High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click. If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is opened. ■ Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams. When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on. 2 Lights On Indicator P. 92 ■ Flashing the high beams If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Models with smart entry system Canadian models High Beams Pull the lever back, and release it. Canadian models Flashing the high beams Low Beams Turns on parking lights, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights Turns on headlights, side marker, parking lights, tail, and rear license plate lights ■ Lights off Turn the lever to OFF either when: • The shift lever is in (P . • The parking brake is applied. To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: • The transmission is moved out of (P and the parking brake is released. • The vehicle starts to move. Continued Controls Flashing the high beams Low Beams Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge. 171 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 172 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches ■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) * U.S. models Automatic lighting control can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. U.S. models Controls When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) * We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities. The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly. Models without automatic intermittent wipers Light Sensor Canadian models Canadian models When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness. The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO. u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 172 * Not available on all models Models with automatic intermittent wipers Light Sensor 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 173 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches ■ Headlight Integration with Wipers * The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a number of certain intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped. ■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature U.S. models You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follow: Setting The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at Max High Mid Low Min Bright Dark 2 Customized Features P. 123 If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO * position). The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime. Controls The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door. 1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) * 1Headlight Integration with Wipers * This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on. At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps. 1Automatic Lighting Off Feature Models with multi-information display You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Customized Features P. 123 *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models 173 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 174 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights * Fog Lights * When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights. Fog Light Switch Controls 174 * Not available on all models 1Fog Lights * When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the instrument panel will be on. They go off when the headlights turn off, or when the daytime running lights are on. 2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 92 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 175 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDaytime Running Lights Daytime Running Lights The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met: • The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. U.S. models • The headlight switch is OFF. 1Daytime Running Lights The daytime running lights come on dimmer when the headlight switch is in than when it is in AUTO *. In AUTO *, if the ambient brightness is dark, the low beam headlights come on. Canadian models • The headlight switch is AUTO. All models The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights. Controls • The parking brake is released. The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the head light switch is in AUTO * and it is getting darker outside. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models 175 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 176 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam * Auto High-Beam * The front sensor camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation. Front Sensor Camera 1Auto High-Beam * The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary. If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually. Controls The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle. ■ How to Use the Auto High-Beam When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator comes on and the auto high-beam is activated. • The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Auto High• The light switch is in AUTO. Beam • The lever is in the low beam position. Indicator • The headlights have been automatically activated. Light Switch • It is dark outside the vehicle. If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. • Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 176 * Not available on all models Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 For the auto high-beam to work properly: • Do not place an object that reflects light on the dashboard. • Keep the windshield around the camera clean. When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens. • Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area around the camera. • Do not touch the camera lens. If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 177 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam * ■ Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam 1How to Use the Auto High-Beam When auto-high beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions. Switching to low beam: All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. • Your vehicle speed is 45 mph (72 km/h) or more. • There are no preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. • There are few street lights on the road ahead. One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. • Your vehicle speed is 30 mph (48 km/h) or less. • There is a preceding or oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. • There are many street lights on the road ahead. ■ Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto highbeam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated. Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving. u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on. Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to . u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on. Continued • The brightness of the lights from the preceding or oncoming vehicle is intense or poor. • Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow, fog, windshield frost, etc.). • Surrounding light sources, such as street lights, • • • • • • • electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead. The brightness level of the road ahead constantly changes. The road is bumpy or has many curves. A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction. Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle. The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under roadside trees or behind median barriers. The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle. Controls Switching to high beam: In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually. The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low beam when: • Windshield wipers are operating. • The camera has been detected a dense fog. 177 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 178 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam * ■ How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam Controls You can turn the auto high-beam system off. If you want to turn the system off or on, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, then carry out the following procedures while the vehicle is stationary. To turn the system off: AUTO Position With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 40 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks twice, release the lever. To turn the system on: With the light switch is in AUTO, pull the lever toward you and hold it for at least 30 seconds. After the auto high-beam indicator light blinks once, release the lever. 1How to Use the Auto High-Beam If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: • Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera. • Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera. If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 1How to Turn Off the Auto High-Beam If you turn the auto high-beam system off, the system does not operate until you turn the system on. Park in a safe place before turning the system off or on. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 178 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 179 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers Wipers and Washers ■ Windshield Wiper/Washer 1Wipers and Washers The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Pull to use washer. MIST OFF INT*2/AUTO*3 LO: Low speed wipe ■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT*2/AUTO*3, LO, HI) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain. NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on. Controls Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring * ■ MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever. NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged. Models with intermittent time adjustment ring ■ Adjusting wiper operation * Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper delay. Lower speed, fewer sweeps HI: High speed wipe Higher speed, more sweeps If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same. All models ■ Washer Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop. Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. *2: Models with manual intermittent operation *3: Models with automatic intermittent operation * Not available on all models Continued 179 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 180 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers ■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers * When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode. Controls Adjustment Ring The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stops in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects. ■ Auto sensitivity adjustment When in AUTO, you can also adjust the rainfall sensor sensitivity using the adjustment ring. 1Wipers and Washers If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then remove the obstacle. The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal. 1Automatic Intermittent Wipers * The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below. Rainfall Sensor Sensor sensitivity Low sensitivity High sensitivity NOTICE *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 180 * Not available on all models AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: • Cleaning the windshield • Driving through a car wash • No rain present 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 181 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers ■ Rear Wiper/Washer The rear wiper and washer can be used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. ■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT, ON) Change the wiper switch setting according to the amount of rain. OFF Washer ■ Washer ( ) Sprays while you rotate the switch to this position. Controls ON INT: Intermittent Hold it to activate the wiper and to spray the washer. Once released, it stops operating after a few more sweeps. ■ Operating in reverse When you shift the transmission to (R with the windshield wiper activated, the rear wiper operates automatically as follows even if its switch is off. Front Wiper Position Rear Wiper Operation INT (Intermittent) AUTO * (Intermittent) Intermittent * LO (Low speed wipe) HI (High speed wipe) Continuous *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models 181 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 182 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield * Defogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield * ■ Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button Models with heating and cooling system Press the rear defogger button or touch the icon to defog the rear window and mirrors * when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Models with climate control system Controls Models with climate control system The rear defogger and heated door mirrors * automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, they do not automatically switch off. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 182 * Not available on all models 1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 183 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluDefogger/Heated Door Mirror */Heated Windshield * Canadian models 1Heated Windshield Button ■ Heated Windshield Button Press the heated windshield button to deice the windshield when the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been deiced. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine. The heated windshield automatically switch off after 15 minutes. Controls *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 183 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 184 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control Brightness Control When the ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the (select/reset) knob to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the knob to the right. Dim: Turn the knob to the left. (Select/Reset) Knob Controls You will hear a beeper when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen. 1Brightness Control The brightness of the instrument panel will be reduced when the following conditions: • The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Models without automatic lighting control • The parking lights are turned on. Models with automatic lighting control • The light switch is in any position other than off and it is dark outside. To cancel the reduced instrument panel brightness when the exterior lights are on, turn the knob to the right until the brightness display is up to max, the beeper sounds. The brightness can be set differently for when the exterior lights are on, and when they are off. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 184 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 185 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control Models with information display Controls Models with multi-information display ■ Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the information display/multi-information display while you are adjusting it. 185 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 186 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel Adjusting the Steering Wheel Controls 186 The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture. 1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up. u The steering wheel adjustment lever is To adjust under the steering column. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out. To lock u Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators. 3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever Lever down to lock the steering wheel in position. u After adjusting the position, make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out. 1Adjusting the Steering Wheel 3 WARNING Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash. Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 187 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Adjusting the Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position. ■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions * Tab Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 190 Controls Daytime Position Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare from headlights behind you when driving after dark. 1Adjusting the Mirrors Night Position * Not available on all models Continued 187 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 188 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the MirrorsuInterior Rearview Mirror ■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * Models without HomeLink buttons Controls Indicator Sensor Auto Button Models with HomeLink buttons Sensor Auto Button 188 * Not available on all models When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. Press the auto button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the auto indicator comes on. 1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror * The auto dimming function cancels when the shift position is in (R . 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 189 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors Power Door Mirrors Selector Switch Adjustment Switch You can adjust the door mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1. Controls ■ Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 189 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 190 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Adjusting the Seats Front Seats Allow sufficient space. Move back. Controls Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible. ■ Adjusting the Seat Positions Horizontal Position Adjustment 190 * Not available on all models 3 WARNING Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate. Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. ■ Adjusting the driver’s power seat * Height Adjustment (Driver’s seat only) 1Adjusting the Seats Always make seat adjustments before driving. 1Adjusting the Seat Positions Seat-back Angle Adjustment Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 191 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s) * Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat. Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the seat, then release the bar. Pull up the lever to change the angle. Controls Horizontal Position Adjustment Driver’s seat is shown. * Not available on all models Continued 191 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 192 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats ■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs 1Adjusting the Seat-Backs Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel. Controls 192 The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position. Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant’s chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury. 3 WARNING Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat. Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back. Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation. If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 193 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats Rear Seats ■ Adjusting the Rear Seat-Backs Pull the lever on the right to change the angle of the right half of the seat-back, and left for the left half. Controls Release Lever Continued 193 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 194 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats ■ Folding Down the Rear Seats 1Folding Down the Rear Seats The rear seats can be folded down separately to allow for additional storage space. ■ To fold down the seat Controls 1. Store the center seat belt first. Insert the latch plate into the slot on the side of the anchor buckle. 2. Retract the seat belt into the holder on the ceiling. Anchor Buckle Release Lever 194 Make sure all items in the cargo area or items extending to the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard. Remove any items from the rear seat cushion and floor before you fold down the rear seat. To lock the seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. 2 Seat Belt with Detachable Anchor P. 47 Latch Plate 3. Lower the head restraint to its lowest position. 4. Pull the release lever and fold down the seat-back. Make sure the seat-back, head restraints and seat cushion are securely latched back into place before driving. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back, and the center shoulder belt is re-positioned in the holding slot. To return the seat to the original position, pull up the seat-back in the upright position. Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly. 2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 62 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 195 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats ■ Folding the Rear Seat Up 1Folding the Rear Seat Up Separately lift up the left and right halves of the rear seat cushions to make room for cargo area. Loop ■ Lifting up the seat cushion 1. Make sure the seat belt buckles are in their loops on the seat. Check if there are any items on the seat before you pull the seat cushion up. Check if there are any obstacles around the floor guide before you put the seat back in the original position. Controls 2. Pull up the rear seat cushion. 3. Fold the seat leg down while pushing the seat cushion firmly against the seat-back to lock it. After you fold the seat up, or put it back in the original position, make sure the seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back. Seat Leg Seat Leg Latch Floor Guide ■ Putting the seat in the original position 1. Hold the seat cushion in the upright position, and pull up the seat leg fully. u The seat cushion can abruptly fall down once you pull up the seat leg. 2. Slowly put down the seat cushion and set the seat leg in the floor guide. u A latch comes out when the leg is set properly. 195 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 196 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position Maintain a Proper Sitting Position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. Controls 196 In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag. 1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position 3 WARNING Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 197 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints Head Restraints Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions. 1Adjusting the front head restraint positions 3 WARNING ■ Adjusting the front head restraint positions Position head in the center of the head restraint. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button. Continued Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash. Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving. In order for the head restraint system to work properly: • Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs. • Do not place any objects between an occupant and the seat-back. • Install each restraint in its proper location. Controls Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant’s head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant’s ears should be level with the center height of the restraint. 197 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 198 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints ■ Changing the Rear Seat Head Restraint Positions Outer Controls 198 Center A passenger sitting in a back seating position should adjust the height of their head restraint to an appropriate position before the vehicle begins moving. To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 199 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints ■ Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair. To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the restraint up and out. 3 WARNING Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash. Always replace the head restraints before driving. To remove and install the rear outer head restraint, recline the seat-back slightly forward as the space between the ceiling and the seat-back is limited. Controls To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position. 1Removing and Reinstalling the Head Restraints 199 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 200 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest Armrest ■ Using the Front Seat Armrest The console lid can be used as an armrest. To adjust: Slide the armrest to the desired position. Controls ■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest * Pull down the armrest in the center backrest. 200 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 201 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items Interior Lights ■ Interior Light Switches 1Interior Light Switches ■ ON Front * Off Models without smart entry system Rear Door Activated Position On Off Models without smart entry system • When you remove the key from the ignition switch but do not open a door. Models with smart entry system • You remove the key from the ignition switch. Models with smart entry system • When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF Controls Door Activated Position The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. ■ Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: • When any doors are opened. • You unlock the driver’s door. In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations: • When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it. (LOCK) but do not open a door. Models with multi-information display • When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Customized Features P. 123 ■ OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations: • When you lock the driver’s door. • When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. Models without smart entry system • When you close the driver’s door with the key in the ignition switch. Models with smart entry system • When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY mode. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models Continued 201 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 202 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights ■ Map Lights Models with moonroof 1Interior Light Switches The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the lenses. To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the engine is off. If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition switch, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes. Controls 1Map Lights Models without moonroof Models with moonroof When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the lens. ■ Cargo Area Light ■ ON On Off The light comes on when you open the tailgate, and goes off when closed. ■ OFF The light stays off with or without opening the tailgate. 202 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 203 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Interior Convenience Items ■ Glove Box 1Glove Box Pull the handle to open the glove box. 3 WARNING An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt. Always keep the glove box closed while driving. Controls ■ Console Compartment Pull the handle to open the console compartment. Continued 203 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 204 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Beverage Holders 1Beverage Holders ■ Front seat beverage holders Front Door NOTICE Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior. Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you. Controls ■ Center console beverage holders Center Console To put a short-size beverage: Push down the bottom plate. Bottom plate To put a tall-size beverage: Pull up the bottom plate. 204 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 205 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Rear Door ■ Rear seat beverage holders Controls At the Back of the Center Console Continued 205 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 206 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Cargo Floor Box Pull up the cargo area floor lid. 2WD models Controls Cargo Floor Box AWD models Cargo Floor Box 206 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 207 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Accessory Power Sockets 1Accessory Power Sockets The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1. ■ Accessory power socket (console panel) Open the cover to use it. NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket. Each accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less. Cover ■ Accessory power socket (rearward of center console) Open the cover to use it. Controls To prevent battery drain, only use the power socket with the engine running. When both sockets are being used, the combined power rating of the accessories should not exceed 180 watts (15 amps). *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 207 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 208 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Canadian models ■ Accessory power socket (cargo area) Open the cover to use it. Controls ■ Coat Hook 1Coat Hook There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle. Pull it down to use it. 208 The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 209 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Tie-down Anchors The tie-down anchors on the cargo area floor can be used to install a net for securing items. Front Anchors Controls Rear Anchors Continued 209 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 210 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items Canadian models 1Cargo Cover ■ Cargo Cover The cargo cover can be used to conceal your items and protect them from direct sunlight. ■ To remove: Pull out the cargo cover rearwards and remove it. Controls ■ To fold: The cargo cover is collapsible. 1. Take the opposite sides, fold the cover halfway, then twist into opposite ways. 2. Curl to narrow the cover as shown. 210 Do not let anyone access items in the cargo area while driving. Loose items can cause injury if you have to brake hard. Do not stack objects higher than the top of the seat in the cargo area. They could block your view and be thrown about the vehicle during a sudden stop. To prevent cargo cover damage, do not: • Place items on the cargo cover. • Put weight on the cargo cover. When reinstalling the cargo cover, put the tagged side first. Tag 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 211 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items ■ Seat Heaters * 1Seat Heaters * The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use the seat heaters. 3 WARNING Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters. Touch the seat heater icon. Once - The HI setting (two indicators on) Twice - The LO setting Three times - The OFF setting (no indicator on) Controls Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters. Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start. In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and does not automatically turn off. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models 211 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 212 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Heating and Cooling System * Using Vents, Heating and A/C Dashboard vents Dashboard and floor vents Floor vents Floor and defroster vents Defroster vents Controls Fan Control Dial Mode Control Dial Adjusts the fan speed. Rotate the dial all the way to OFF to turn everything off. Changes airflow. Temperature Control Dial Adjusts the interior temperature. A/C Button Press to cool the interior or dehumidify while heating. (Recirculation) Button Press the button and switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. 212 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 213 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C ■ Passenger Side Vents Three separate front passenger side air vents allow for different air flow rates through the vehicle. Passengers can separately: • Adjust each vent to optimize airflow Adjust from side to side or up and throughout the vehicle. down Low High Controls Mid • Close individual vents to adjust passenger comfort levels. Continued 213 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 214 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C ■ Heating 1Heating The heater uses heat from the engine coolant to warm the air. 1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial. 2. Select . 3. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial. Controls ■ To rapidly warm up the interior 1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. 2. Select . 3. Set the temperature to maximum warm. 4. Press the button (the indicator on). ■ To dehumidify the interior When used in combination with the heater, the air conditioning system makes the interior warm and dry and can prevent the windows from fogging up. 1. Turn the fan on. 2. Press the A/C button to turn on the air conditioning. 214 When you select , the mode automatically switches to fresh air. 1To rapidly warm up the interior Change to fresh air mode as soon as the interior gets warm enough. The windows may fog up if kept in recirculation mode. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 215 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHeating and Cooling System * uUsing Vents, Heating and A/C ■ Cooling 1. Adjust the fan speed using the fan control dial. 2. Select . 3. Adjust the temperature using the temperature control dial. 4. Press the A/C button (indicator on). 1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. 2. Set the temperature to maximum cool. 3. Press the button (the indicator on). ■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Selecting turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode. ■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Set the fan to the maximum speed. 2. Select . 3. Press the button. 4. Set the temperature to maximum warm. If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows. While ECON mode is active, the system may have reduced performance. Controls ■ To rapidly cool down the interior 1To rapidly cool down the interior 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows. 1To rapidly defrost the windows After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility. 215 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 216 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Climate Control System * Using Automatic Climate Control The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible. Models without SYNC icon 1Using Automatic Climate Control If any icons are selected while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the icon that was selected will take priority. The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions unrelated to the icon that was selected will be controlled automatically. To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO icon is selected. Controls Dashboard vents Temperature Control Icons Dashboard and floor vents Floor vents Floor and defroster vents Mode Control Icon Fan Control Icons If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down. When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed. You can raise or lower the temperature or fan speed setting flicking either control icon. AUTO Icon (On/Off) Icon A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon (Windshield Defroster) Icon (Fresh Air) Icon (Recirculation) Icon Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Select the AUTO icon. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control icons. 3. Select the icon to cancel. 216 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 217 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control Models with SYNC icon 1Using Automatic Climate Control Selecting the icon switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection. Dashboard vents AUTO Icon (On/Off) Icon SYNC Icon Floor vents Floor and defroster vents Mode Control Icon Passenger Side Temperature Control Icons Controls Driver Side Temperature Control Icons Dashboard and floor vents While ECON mode is active, the system may have reduced performance. (Windshield Defroster) Icon (Recirculation) Icon A/C (Air Conditioning) Icon Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Select the AUTO icon. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver side temperature control icons. 3. Select the icon to cancel. Continued 217 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 218 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes Models without SYNC icon Select the (recirculation) or (fresh air) icon to switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. Models with SYNC icon Controls 218 Select the (recirculation) icon to switch the mode depending on environmental conditions. Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through the system. Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in fresh air mode in normal situations. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 219 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Models without SYNC icon 1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows Select the icon to turn the air conditioning system on and automatically switch the system to fresh air mode. Select the icon again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings. For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving. Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up. Controls If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that the air hits the side windows. Models with SYNC icon Continued 219 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 220 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control Models without SYNC icon ■ To rapidly defrost the windows 1. Select the 2. Select the Controls 220 Models with SYNC icon icon. icon. 1To rapidly defrost the windows After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 221 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Turning On and Off the Touch Screen Beep 1Turning On and Off the Touch Screen Beep If you touch any other icons during this procedure, the setting may fail. In this case, once you turn the ignition switch to OFF (0 *1, then follow this procedure again. Controls You hear the beep when operating the climate control system on the touch screen. This can be turned on and off. To turn off the beep: Models without SYNC icon 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Touch the of the temperature control icon five times while pressing and holding the . 3. Release the , after -- blinks five times and OF is displayed. Models with SYNC icon *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 221 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 222 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control Models without SYNC icon To turn on the beep: 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Touch the of the temperature control icon five times while pressing and holding the . 3. Release the , after OF blinks five times and -- is displayed. Controls Models with SYNC icon *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 222 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 223 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Touch Panel Sensitivity Setting 1Touch Panel Sensitivity Setting If you touch any other icons during this procedure, the setting may fail. In this case, once you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, then follow this procedure again. Controls You can set the level of sensitivity of the touch control panel to high, normal, or low. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. Models without SYNC icon 2. Press and hold the AUTO icon, then press Temperature display area any of the following icons five times to set the level. • : High (Hi)*2. u Previous setting blinks five times and Hi will be displayed in the temperature display area. • : Normal (--) u Previous setting blinks five times and -will be displayed in the temperature display area. • : Low (Lo) Models with SYNC icon u Previous setting blinks five times and Lo Temperature display area will be displayed in the temperature display area. 3. Release the AUTO icon. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. *2: Default setting Continued 223 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 224 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control ■ Synchronization Mode * Controls Driver Side Temperature Control Icon 1Synchronization Mode * When the system is in dual mode, the driver side temperature and the passenger side temperature can be set separately. Passenger Side Temperature Control Icon SYNC Icon You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver side and the passenger side in synchronization mode. 1. Select the SYNC icon. u The system switches to synchronization mode. 2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control icon. Select the SYNC icon to return to dual mode. 224 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 225 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors Automatic Climate Control Sensors Sensor The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them. Controls Sensor 225 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 226 226 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 227 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Features This chapter describes how to operate technology features. Audio System About Your Audio System.................... 228 USB Port(s) ........................................... 229 Audio System Theft Protection ............. 230 Audio Remote Controls........................ 231 Models with color audio system Audio System Basic Operation............. 234 Audio/Information Screen .................... 235 Adjusting the Sound ............................ 239 Display Setup ....................................... 240 Playing AM/FM Radio ........................... 241 Playing a CD ........................................ 243 Playing an iPod..................................... 246 Playing a USB Flash Drive...................... 249 Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 252 * Not available on all models Models with display audio system Audio System Basic Operation ............ 255 Audio/Information Screen .................... 256 Adjusting the Sound ............................ 271 Display Setup ....................................... 272 Voice Control Operation ...................... 274 Playing AM/FM Radio........................... 278 Playing SiriusXM® Radio * ..................... 282 Playing an iPod .................................... 290 Song By VoiceTM (SBV).......................... 293 Playing Pandora® ................................. 297 Playing a USB Flash Drive ..................... 299 Playing Bluetooth® Audio..................... 302 HondaLink® ......................................... 304 Wi-Fi Connection..................................309 Siri® Eyes Free.......................................311 Apple CarPlayTM ....................................312 Android AutoTM ....................................316 Audio Error Messages ...........................323 General Information on the Audio System ..... 329 Models with color audio system Customized Features.............................345 Models with display audio system Customized Features.............................352 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver *.......367 Models with color audio system Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................370 Models with display audio system Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..................393 227 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 228 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Audio System About Your Audio System The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service *. It can also play audio CDs *, WMA/MP3/AAC files, USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices. You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface *. Features USB Port Remote Controls *1:Models with display audio system *2:Models with color audio system 228 * Not available on all models USB Flash Drive USB Port*1 Video CDs, DVDs, and 3-inch (8-cm) mini CDs are not supported. iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc. State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle. SiriusXM® Radio * is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio *, contact a dealer. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 329 iPod *1, *2 1About Your Audio System SiriusXM® Radio * is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. SiriusXM® * is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 229 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s) USB Port(s) * * 1. Open the cover. 2. Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash drive to the USB port. u The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files on a USB flash drive, connecting a cellular phone and charging devices. u The USB port (1.5 A) * is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM. 1USB Port(s) • Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the • • • • If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod. Features • vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it. We recommend using an extension cable with the USB port. Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a hub. Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged. We recommend your data backed up before using the device in your vehicle. Displayed messages may vary depending on the device model and software version. USB charge The USB port can supply up to 1.0A/1.5A * of power. It does not output 1.0A/1.5A unless the device requests. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 first. Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise in the radio you are listening to. *1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models 229 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 230 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection Audio System Theft Protection The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system. ■ Reactivating the audio system 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked. Features *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 230 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 231 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Audio Remote Controls Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. SOURCE Button Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows: Button Models with color audio system Button SOURCE Button (Menu) Button * Models with display audio system FMAMSirius XM® *USBiPod Bluetooth® AudioPandora® *Apps/Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM (Volume) Buttons : To increase the volume. : To decrease the volume. Features Press Press Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be operated. FMAMCDUSBiPod Bluetooth® Audio Button 1Audio Remote Controls Button • When listening to the radio Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong radio station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong radio station. • When listening to the SiriusXM® radio * Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next channel. Press and hold : To select the previous channel. * Not available on all models Continued 231 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 232 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Features • When listening to a CD *, iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. • When listening to a CD * or USB flash drive Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder. • When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio Press and hold : To go to the group up.*1 Press and hold : To go to the group down.*1 • When listening to Internet radio * Press : To skip to the next song. Press and hold : To select the next station. Press and hold : To select the previous station. *1: Available on specific phones only. 232 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 233 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls Models with display audio system * Not available on all models 1Audio Remote Controls The button is available only when the audio mode is FM, AM, USB, iPod, Pandora® *, or Bluetooth® Audio. Features Steering Wheel (Menu) Button • When listening to the radio Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, or Seek. • When listening to the SiriusXM® radio * Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Save Preset, Channel, or Category. • When listening to a USB flash drive Press : To display the menu items. You can select Scan, Repeat, or Random. • When listening to an iPod Press : To display the menu items. You can select Repeat or Shuffle. • When listening to a Bluetooth® Audio Press : To display the menu items. You can select Pause or Play. • When listening to a Pandora® * Press : To display the menu items. You can select Bookmark, or Play/Pause. 233 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 234 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Audio System Basic Operation Models with color audio system 1Audio System Basic Operation To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w . Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK (Sound) (Day/Night) button to access some audio functions. Button Button These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate Press Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions. (Back) Button Features 234 MENU/ CLOCK Button Selector Knob Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any mode. The available mode includes the wallpaper, display, clock, language setup, and play modes. Play modes can be also selected from scan, random, repeat, and so on. (Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display. (Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode. (Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen brightness. Press , then adjust the brightness using . u Each time you press , the mode switches between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and OFF mode. to select. to enter. Menu Items 2 Adjust Clock P. 134 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 237 2 Display Setup P. 240 2 Scan P. 242, 245, 251 2 Play Mode P. 245, 248, 251 2 RDS Settings P. 242 2 Bluetooth P. 349, 376 Press the SOURCE, , , or button on the steering wheel to change any audio setting. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 231 One of the operating system used in this unit is eCos. For software license terms and conditions, visit their website (eCos license URL: http:// ecos.sourceware.org/license-overview.html) For source code disclosure and other details regarding eCos, visit: http:// www.hondaopensource2.com 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 235 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various setup options. ■ Switching the Display Audio/Information Screen Audio Features Clock/Wallpaper Continued 235 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 236 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Audio Shows the current audio information. ■ Clock/Wallpaper Shows a clock screen or an image you import. ■ Change display 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio. Features 236 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 237 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. ■ Import wallpaper You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive. 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port. • When importing wallpaper files, the image must be • • • • 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Continued • • Features 2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 3. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 5. Rotate to select Import, then press . u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Rotate to select a desired picture, then press . u The selected picture is displayed. 7. Press to save the picture. 8. Press to select OK. 9. Rotate to select a location to save the picture, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen. in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported. The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). The individual file size limit is 2 MB. The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black. Up to 255 files can be selected. If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No compatible images were found. See Owner’s Manual. message appears. 237 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 238 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Select wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Select, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a desired wallpaper, then press 1Wallpaper Setup To go back to the previous screen, press the (Back) button. When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed. . ■ To view wallpaper once it is set Features 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Change, then press . 4. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press . ■ Delete wallpaper 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Wallpaper, then press . 4. Rotate to select Delete, then press . u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 5. Rotate to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press 6. Rotate to select Yes, then press . u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen. 238 . 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 239 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound (sound) Button Press the (sound) button, and rotate to scroll through the following choices: 1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. LIST/SELECT (Selector) Knob TRE is selectable. Bass TRE Treble FAD Fader BAL Balance SVC Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation Features BAS Rotate to adjust the sound setting, then press . 239 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 240 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen. ■ Changing the Screen Brightness Features 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Display Adjustment, then press . 4. Rotate to select Brightness, then press . 5. Rotate to adjust the setting, then press . ■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select Color Theme, then press . 4. Rotate to select the setting you want, then press . 240 1Changing the Screen Brightness You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 241 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Playing AM/FM Radio RADIO Button Press to select a band. Audio/Information Screen Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. Preset Buttons (1-6) To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep. To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button. Features VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. Continued 241 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 242 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Radio Data System (RDS) 1Playing AM/FM Radio Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station. ■ To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select the station, then press You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory. . Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 231 ■ Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Rotate to select Update List, then press . Features ■ Radio text 1Radio Data System (RDS) Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Settings, then press . 3. Rotate to select RDS Settings, then press . 4. Rotate to select Radio Text, then press . ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button. 2. Rotate to select Scan, then press . To turn off scan, press 242 The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. . When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 243 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD Playing a CD Your audio system supports audio CDs, CD-Rs, and CD-RWs in either MP3 or WMA, or AAC*1 format. With the CD loaded, press the MEDIA button. Audio/Information Screen CD Slot Insert a CD about halfway into the CD slot. (CD Eject) Button Press to eject a CD. Features MEDIA Button Press to play a CD. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change tracks (files in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Press and hold to move rapidly within a track/file. Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode. Selector Knob Turn to change tracks/files. Press to display a track/folder list. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. Continued 243 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 244 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD ■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob (MP3/WMA/AAC) 1Playing a CD NOTICE 1. Press to switch the display to a folder list. Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. The label can cause the CD to jam in the unit. WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file. Features Folder Selection to select a folder. If you eject the CD but do not remove it from the slot, the system reloads the CD automatically after several seconds. Track Selection 244 2. Rotate Text data appears on the display under the following circumstances: • When you select a new folder, file, or track. • When you change the audio mode to CD. • When you insert a CD. 3. Press to display a list of tracks in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a track, then press . 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 245 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a CD ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a track or file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Press the selected button. Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Repeat One Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current track/file. Random Random in Folder (MP3/WMA/AAC): Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all tracks/files in random order. Scan Scan Folders (MP3/WMA/AAC): Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all tracks on the CD (all files in the current folder in MP3, WMA, or AAC). Features ■ To turn off a play mode 1How to Select a Play Mode You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . 245 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 246 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected. Features MEDIA Button Press to select iPod (if connected). VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change songs. Press and hold to move rapidly within a song. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. Album Art Play Mode Buttons Press to select a play mode. 246 Audio/Information Screen (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display or cancel a setting. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 247 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the Selector Knob 1. Press to display the iPod music list. 1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio display. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 324 Item Selection 2. Rotate to select a category. Features Category Selection 3. Press to display a list of items in the category. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed. Continued 247 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 248 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Features 248 ■ To turn off a play mode Press the selected button. 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current song. You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 249 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected. Audio/Information Screen Features MEDIA Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected). VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Selector Knob Turn to change files. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection. / (Seek/Skip) Buttons Press or to change files. Press and hold to move rapidly within a file. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. Play Mode Buttons (1-6) Press to select a play mode. (Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display. *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. Continued 249 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 250 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob 1. Press to display a folder list. 1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 329 Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file. Folder Selection 2. Rotate to select a folder. Features Track Selection 250 3. Press to display a list of files in that folder. 4. Rotate to select a file, then press . If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 324 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 251 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file. Available mode icons appear above the play mode buttons. Press the button corresponding to the mode you want to select. Play Mode Buttons Play Mode Menu Items Repeat Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file. Random Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All: Plays all files in random order. Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder. Features ■ To turn off a play mode Press the selected button. 1How to Select a Play Mode You can also select a play mode by pressing the MENU/CLOCK button. Rotate to select Play Mode, then press . Rotate to select a mode, then press . To turn it off, rotate to select Normal Play, then press . 251 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 252 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system. 2 Phone Setup P. 376 Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. MEDIA Button Press to select Bluetooth® Audio. Audio/Information Screen Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876. In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. Features Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected. If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be a delay before the system begins to play. VOL/ (Volume/ Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Pause Button (Preset 2) Press to pause playing a file. Play Button (Preset 1) Press to resume playing a file. / Press 252 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio (Seek/Skip) Buttons or to change files. MENU/CLOCK Button Press to display the menu items. In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly. Some functions may not be available on some devices. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 253 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files MEDIA Button Pause Button Play Button 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL. 2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth Audio Source is selected. If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected. To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions. The pause function may not be available on some phones. If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system. ■ To pause or resume a file Press a Play or Pause button to select a mode. Continued Features Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. 253 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 254 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob 1. Press Features Category Selection Item Selection 254 2. Rotate to display the music search list. to select a category. 3. Press to display a list of items in the category. 4. Rotate to select an item, then press . u Press and rotate repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed. 1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector Knob Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 255 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Audio System Basic Operation Models with display audio system 1Audio System Basic Operation To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1. (Home): Select to go to the home screen. (Home) (Day/Night) Button (Menu): Select to display available options including Sound, View Radio Text, Music Search, and playback modes. (Back): Select to go back to the previous display when it is displayed. (Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen brightness. Press once and select (- or (+ to make an adjustment. u Each time you press , the mode switches among the daytime mode, nighttime mode and off mode. Features (Menu) (Back) 2 Switching the Display P. 256 Audio Menu Items 2 Station List P. 279, 280 2 Music Search P. 291, 300, 303 2 Scan P. 280, 281, 289 2 How to Select a Play Mode P. 292, 301 *1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 255 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 256 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Audio/Information Screen Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options. ■ Switching the Display ■ Using the Press the button (display) button to change the display. Features (Display) Button 256 Audio/Information Screen 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 257 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Using the audio/information screen Home Screen Features Select to go to the home screen. Select Audio, Phone, Info, Settings, Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), Navigation *, HondaLink, or App List. ■ Audio Displays the current audio information. ■ Phone Displays the HFL information. 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 393 * Not available on all models Continued 257 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 258 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Info Displays Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper, or System/Device Information. Select on the Info Menu screen to see all available options: Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and System/Device Information. Features Trip Computer: • Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. • History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A. To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes. Voice Info: Displays the all commands list. Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper. System/Device Information: • System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system. • USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device. • Switch USB Device: Connects or disconnects USB device to this audio system. ■ Settings Enters the customizing menu screen. 2 Customized Features P. 352 ■ Smartphone Connection Displays the Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM. 2 Apple CarPlayTM P. 312 2 Android AutoTM P. 316 258 1Audio/Information Screen Touchscreen operation • Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions. • Some items may be grayed out during driving to reduce the potential for distraction. • You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or use voice commands. • Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen response. You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 352 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 259 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Navigation * Displays the navigation screen. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual ■ HondaLink Displays the HondaLink® screen. 2 HondaLink® P. 304 ■ App List Adds or removes apps or widgets on the Home screen. 2 Home Screen P. 263 Features * Not available on all models Continued 259 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 260 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout 1. Select . 2. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. 4. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen. Features 260 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 261 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Wallpaper Setup 1Wallpaper Setup You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen. ■ Import wallpaper You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive. 1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Continued in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported. • The file name must be fewer than 64 characters. • The file format of the image that can be imported is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg). • The individual file size limit is 5 MB. • The maximum image size is 4,096 x 4,096 pixels. If the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black. • If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures, the No files detected message appears. Features 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. 5. Select Add New Wallpaper. u The picture name is displayed on the list. 6. Select a desired picture. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. 7. Select Start Import to save the data. u The display will return to the wallpaper list. • When importing wallpaper files, the image must be 261 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 262 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Select wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 4. Select a desired wallpaper. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 5. Select Set. u The display will return to the wallpaper list. 1Wallpaper Setup From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a preview at full-size screen. ■ To view wallpaper once it is set Features 1. Select . 2. Select Info. 3. Select . 4. Select Clock/Wallpaper. ■ Delete wallpaper 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Clock/Info. 3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab. u The screen changes to the wallpaper list. 4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete. u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 5. Select Delete. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes to delete completely. u The display will return to the wallpaper list. 262 To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or select (Back). When the file size is large, it takes a while to be previewed. To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All, then Yes. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 263 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Home Screen 1Home Screen The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add any more pages. ■ To change to a next screen Swipe Icon or Current page position , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen. Continued Features Selecting Icon 263 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 264 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To use apps or widgets 1To use apps or widgets 1. Select . 2. Select or App List. u The APPS screen appears. 3. Select the app or widget you want to use. (APPS) Icon Features Preinstall app list: • Browser: Displays the web browser utilized by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection. • Calculator: Displays Calculator. • Downloads: Displays the data downloaded from the web browser and so on. • App Installer: Check with a Honda dealer for apps that are available for installation. • Search: Displays various retrieval screens. Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen. Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 366 If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 366 In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer. There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen will return to before the browser startup. Do not install apps other than those confirmed by a Honda dealer. Installation of unauthorized apps may introduce data corruption risks to your vehicle’s information and your privacy. You can delete user installed apps by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Information. 6. Select an App that you want to delete. 7. Select Delete. Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted. 264 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 265 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen App or widget icons can be added on the home screen. 1. Select . Select and hold. 2. Select . 3. Select and hold empty space on the home screen. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Add App or Add Widget. u The Add app/widget screen appears. Features Continued 265 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 266 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen Select and hold. Features Drag and drop. 266 5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you want to add. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. 7. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 267 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen. 1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be. 3. Select OK. Select and hold. u The screen will return to the home screen. 1To move icons on the home screen You can also move the Audio, Phone, Info, Settings, Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), Navigation *, HondaLink, and App List icons in the same manner. Features Drag and drop. * Not available on all models Continued 267 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 268 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen. 1. Select and hold an icon. u The screen switches to the customization screen. 2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the trash icon. u The icon is removed from the home Select and hold. screen. 3. Select OK. u The screen will return to the home screen. Features Drag and drop to trash icon. 268 * Not available on all models 1To remove icons on the home screen You cannot delete the Audio, Phone, Info, Settings, Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), Navigation *, HondaLink, and App List icons. Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 269 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Status Area Swipe 1. Swipe the upper area of the screen. u The status area appears. 2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Select or swipe up the bottom bar to close the area. Features Bar Status Area Continued 269 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 270 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen ■ Closing Apps You can close specific apps running in the background on the system. 1. Select and hold . 2. Select the Active tab. u If you select the Active/History tab, you can close the apps that are currently running and delete the app activity history simultaneously. 3. Select an app you want to close. 4. Select Clear. u The display will return to the app list. Features 270 * Not available on all models 1Closing Apps If you leave the apps used open in the background, some apps may stop operating properly next time using them. If this happens close unused apps. To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then Yes. You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin * apps. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 271 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound Adjusting the Sound 1. Select . 2. Select Audio. 3. Select . 4. Select Sound. Select a tab from the following choices: • BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble • FAD-BAL: Fader, Balance • SVC: Speed Volume Compensation 1Adjusting the Sound The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High. SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases. You can also adjust the sound the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio, then the Common tab. 4. Select Sound. Features 271 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 272 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup Display Setup You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen. ■ Changing the Screen Brightness 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Display Settings. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK. Features ■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Display tab. 5. Select Background Color. 6. Select the setting you want. 7. Select OK. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes to reboot the system. 272 1Changing the Screen Brightness You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. 1Changing the Screen’s Color Theme Reboot may take a few minutes. If you default the System settings when the color theme is changed from its default color, the system reboots. 2 Customized Features P. 352 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 273 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup ■ Selecting an Audio Source Select the source icon. 1Selecting an Audio Source Source Select Screen If you startup preinstalled audio apps, is displayed on the lower right of the screen. These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the source select screen. You can startup those audio apps from . Source List Icons ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Features Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source. Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a greyed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. 273 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 274 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation Voice Control Operation Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) and (hang-up/back) buttons on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling. 1Voice Control Operation ■ Voice Recognition 1Voice Recognition To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: • Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands. Features 274 2 Voice Portal Screen P. 275 • Close the windows and moonroof *. • Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone on the ceiling. • Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. • Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your command if more than one person is speaking at the same time. * Not available on all models When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command. The voice control system can only be used from the driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger’s side. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 275 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Voice Portal Screen You can also see the list of commands by selecting Info, , and Voice Info. The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized. ■ Audio*1 This can be only used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone call command, the screen will change to the voice recognition screen for the phone commands. • Dial by number • Call history • Redial • Call • Call Phone Call commands are not available if using Apple CarPlayTM. When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change to the audio voice recognition screen. • Audio On • Audio Off • Radio FM • Radio AM • Radio SXM * • iPod • USB ■ Music Search*1 This can be only used when the iPod or USB device is connected. ■ Navigation*1 The screen changes to the navigation voice recognition screen. Features When the (Talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say “Voice Help” after the beep or select Voice Help. ■ Phone Call 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual ■ Voice Settings The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab on the System settings screen. *1: Models with navigation system * Not available on all models Continued 275 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 276 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ Voice Help You can see a list of the available commands on the screen. • Phone Commands • Audio Commands * • On Screen Commands • Music Search Commands * • General Commands * • All Commands • Voice Settings • Getting Started ■ Phone Commands The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone. • Dial by Number • Call by Name • Dial • Call ■ Audio Commands*1 Features The system accepts these commands on the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio. ■ Radio FM Commands • Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM • Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8> FM • Radio FM preset <1-12> ■ Radio AM Commands • Radio tune to <530-1710> AM • Radio AM preset <1-6> ■ Radio SXM Commands * *1: Models with navigation system 276 * Not available on all models • SXM channel <1-255> • SXM channel • Radio SXM preset <1-12> ■ iPod Commands • • • • • iPod play iPod play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to? ■ USB Commands • • • • • USB play USB play track <1-30> Music Search What album is this? What am I listening to? 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 277 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation ■ On Screen Commands When On Screen Commands is selected, the explanation screen is displayed. ■ Music Search Commands*1 The system accepts these commands on the Music Search screen. ■ Using Song By Voice ■ Song By Voice Commands • • • • • • What am I listening to? Who am I listening to? Who is this? What’s playing? Who’s playing? What album is this? • • • • • • Play artist Play track/song Play album Play genre/category Play playlist Play composer ■ List Commands • • • • • List artist List album List genre/category List playlist List composer Features Song By Voice is a feature that allows you to select music from your iPod or USB device using Voice Commands. To activate this mode, you must push the talk switch and say: “Music search”. TM ■ Play Commands ■ General Commands * • What time is it? • What is today’s date? *1: Models with navigation system * Not available on all models 277 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 278 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio Playing AM/FM Radio Features (Menu) Select to display the menu items. (Back) Select to go back to the previous display. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal. Tune Icons Select or to tune the radio frequency. *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 278 Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 7 onwards. Seek Icons Select or to search up and down the selected band for a station with a strong signal. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 279 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Preset Memory 1Preset Memory The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available. To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 231 You can also store a preset station by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into preset memory. Models with HD RadioTM HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and “ARC” logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station. ■ Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh. Continued Features ■ Station List 279 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 280 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or . Models with HD RadioTM ■ HD Subchannel Features Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select . 2. Select HD Subchannel. 3. Select the channel number. ■ Radio Data System (RDS) Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station. ■ To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select the station. ■ Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the Station List tab. 3. Select Refresh. 280 1Radio Data System (RDS) When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 281 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio ■ Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select . 2. Select View Radio Text. ■ Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Cancel or . Features 281 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 282 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * Playing SiriusXM® Radio * Album Art Audio/Information Screen Features (Menu) Select to display the menu items. Station Art (Back) Select to go back to the previous display. Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Skip Icons Select or to change section in the channel. Select and hold to move rapidly within the section. Scan Icon Select to scan each channel. Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category. *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 282 * Not available on all models Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time. Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select to display preset 7 onwards. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 283 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ To Change the Tune Mode 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio * In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.). 1. Select . 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode. There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system. Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel or select SOURCE on the screen. 2 Audio Remote Controls P. 231 Features SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections. Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off from the Audio Settings screen. 2 Customized Features P. 352 * Not available on all models Continued 283 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 284 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Preset Memory To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select to hold the preset number for the station you want to store. 3. Select Replace. You can also store a channel by the following procedure. 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store. Features ■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) 284 * Not available on all models You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset. 1. Tune a station. 2. Select the open/close icon to display a list. 3. Select the Preset tab. 4. Select and hold the preset number you want to add a music channel. u A message appears if there are no available presets. 5. Select Combine. 1Playing SiriusXM® Radio * You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 285 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Listening to Featured Channels 1Listening to Featured Channels Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. 1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list. 2. Select the Channel List tab. 3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to. u The selected channel list of the title is displayed. 4. Select the channel. Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed. Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel list. Features Continued 285 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 286 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Replay Function The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast. 1. Select . 2. Select Playback. 3. Move the gauge to the position you want to replay. Features The following items are available on the pop-up screen: (Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to fastrewind the current selection. (Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection. (15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-rewind the current selection. (15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and hold to fast-forward the current selection. u Select OK or to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues. To play or pause on playback mode: 1. Select . 2. Select Play/Pause. ■ Returning to real-time broadcast 1. Select . 2. Select Go to Live. 286 1Replay Function The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point. You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen. After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data. Audio/Information Screen (A) (B) (C) (A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 287 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Live Sports Alert 1Live Sports Alert While listening to other channel, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams. ■ To set up a favorite team The sports alert function at SiriusXM® mode only. 1To set up a favorite team 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportsFlash Setup. 6. Select a team. Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on. Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON. 2 Customized Features P. 352 ■ To set up a alert message 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportsFlash Setup. 6. Select Interrupt. 7. Select On(one time) or On(continue). Continued Features You can also set up a favorite team by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Settings. 4. Select the SXM tab. 287 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 288 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ To set up a alert beep 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select SportsFlash Setup. 6. Select Interrupt Beep. 7. Select On. ■ Receiving a sports alert Features 288 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert. 2. Select Listen. u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen. 2 Replay Function P. 286 To go back to the previous screen, select Back. 1To set up a alert beep You can also set up a alert beep by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Settings. 4. Select the SXM tab. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 289 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio * ■ Traffic and Weather Information You can receive traffic and weather information. ■ To set up a traffic & weather information 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Audio. 4. Select the SXM tab. 5. Select Traffic & Weather Setup. 6. Select the region. u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered. 1Traffic and Weather Information The traffic and weather information function at SiriusXM® mode only. You can also set up the traffic and weather information by the following procedure. 1. Select Audio. 2. Select . 3. Select Settings. 4. Select the SXM tab. Features ■ Listening to traffic and weather information 1. Select . 2. Select Traffic & Weather. u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode. 2 Replay Function P. 286 To go back to the previous screen, select OK. ■ Scan Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan. 2. Select Scan Channels. u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Song in Presets. To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan. 1Scan The “Scan Songs in Presets” function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®. The “Featured Channels” function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®. TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc. 289 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 290 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod Playing an iPod Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Audio/Information Screen Features (Menu) Select to display the menu items. (Back) Select to go back to the previous display. USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected. Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Cover Art *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 290 Song Icons Select or to change songs. Select and hold to move rapidly within a song. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 291 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List 1. Select 1Playing an iPod and select Music Search. Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 324 Category Selection 2. Select the items on that menu. Select Switch USB Device in the Audio Menu screen to switch to another USB device. Features If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary. If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/ USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay. Item Selection Continued 291 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 292 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a file. Select a mode. Features 292 ■ To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off. 1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in random order. Repeat Song: Repeats the current track. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 293 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Models with navigation system TM Song By Voice (SBV) Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice commands. 1Song By VoiceTM (SBV) Setting options: • On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands ■ To enable SBV are available. • Off: Disable the feature. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice. 6. Select On or Off. Features Continued 293 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 294 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) ■ Searching for music using SBV 1Searching for music using SBV Features 1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On. 2. Press the (Talk) button and say “Music Search” to activate the SBV feature for the USB flash drive and iPod. 3. Press the button and say a command. u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a list of songs by that artist. Select the desired song to start playing. u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start playing songs by that artist. 4. To cancel SBV, press the (hang-up/ back) button on the steering wheel. The selected song continues playing. Once you have canceled this mode, you need to press the button and say “Music Search” again to re-activate this mode. 294 Song By VoiceTM Commands List 2 Song By VoiceTM (SBV) P. 293 NOTE: Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks stored on the USB flash drive or iPod. You can add phonetic modifications of difficult words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands. 2 Phonetic Modification P. 295 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 295 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) ■ Phonetic Modification 1Phonetic Modification Continued Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed out when Song By Voice is set to Off. You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification items. Features Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic Modification. 6. Select New Modification. 7. Select USB or iPod. 295 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 296 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV) Features 296 8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist). u The list of the selected item appears on the screen. 9. Select an entry to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. u The listen to the current phonetic modification, select Play. u To delete the current phonetic modification, select Delete. 10.Select Modify. 11.Select the phonetic spelling you want to use (e.g., ”Artist A”) when prompted. 12.Select OK. u The artist “No Name” is phonetically modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV mode, you can press the (Talk) button and use the voice command “Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the artist “No Name.” 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 297 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® U.S. models Playing Pandora® 1Playing Pandora® Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a compatible smartphone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using your USB cable to the USB port. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora website for more information. To find out if your phone is compatible with this feature, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. Station List Displays/ hides the Station List. (Menu) Select to display the menu items. (Back) Select to go back to the previous display. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Station Up/Down Icons Select to change a station. Bookmark Select to bookmark a track. Like/Dislike Icons Select to evaluate a track. Play/Pause Icon Select to resume or play a track. Skip Icon Select to skip a track. Find the music you love and let the music you love find you. Pandora® gives you a personalized music experience that continually evolves with your tastes. Create personalized stations from songs, artists or genres. Not sure where to start? Use our voice search to easily find stations that match your mood or activity. Features To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app must first be installed on your phone. Visit www.pandora.com. for more information. If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth® Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio system is selected. If your phone is connected to Android AutoTM, Pandora is only available through the Android AutoTM interface. Visit the Android AutoTM website to check compatibility. *1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. Continued 297 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 298 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® ■ Pandora® Menu 1Pandora® Menu You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio system. The available items are: • Station List • Manage Station • Sound • Setting ■ Operating a menu item 1. Select . 2. Select an item. Manage Station Items Genre: Add the selected genre to the station list. Current Artist: Add the current artist to station list. Current Track: Add the current track to station list. Delete: Delete the selected Station from the Station list. Available operating functions vary on software versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle’s audio system. Features If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 Pandora® P. 326 Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit has been reached, your feedback will be saved but the current track will continue to play. To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu, select Station List, and then select a new station. It also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen. 298 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 299 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive Playing a USB Flash Drive Your audio system reads and plays sound and video files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, or AAC*1 format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Audio/Information Screen USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected. Features (Menu) Select to display the menu items. (Back) Select to go back to the previous display. Open/Close Icon*2 Displays/hides the detailed information. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Folder Icons Select to skip to the next folder, and to the beginning of the previous folder. to skip Track Icons Select or to change files. Select and hold to move rapidly within a track. *1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. *2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed. Continued 299 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 300 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List 1. Select and select Music Search. 1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 329 WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file. If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen. 2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 324 Folder Selection Features 2. Select a folder. Select Switch USB Device in the Audio Menu screen to switch to another USB device. Track Selection 3. Select a track. 300 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 301 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive ■ How to Select a Play Mode You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file. 1. Select . 2. Select Scan. 3. Select a mode. Play Mode Menu Items Scan Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the first file in each of the main folders. Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files in the current folder. Random/Repeat Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder. Repeat Track: Repeats the current file. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Features ■ Random/Repeat Select a play mode. 1How to Select a Play Mode Random/Repeat is selected. ■ To turn off a play mode To turn off Scan, select or Cancel Scan. To turn off Random/Repeat, select the mode again. 301 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 302 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio Playing Bluetooth® Audio Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) System. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. Open/Close Icon*1 Displays/hides the detailed information. Audio/Information Screen 1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible. To check if your phone is compatible, visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/. It may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving. Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is automatically connected. Features If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play. In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly. (Menu) Select to display the menu items. Some functions may not be available on some devices. (Back) Select to go back to the previous display. VOL/ (Power/volume) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume. Play Icon Pause Icon Track Icons Select or change tracks. Group Icons Select or group. to to change *1 : Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 302 If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting Connect from Bluetooth Device List. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 303 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio ■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files 1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system. 1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating instructions. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode. If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected. Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone. You can change the connected phone in the Bluetooth® settings on the Audio Menu screen by the following procedure. 1. Select . 2. Select Setting. ■ Searching for Music 1Searching for Music 1. Select . 2. Select Music Search. 3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 4. Select an item. u The selection begins playing. Features ■ To pause or resume a file Select the play icon or pause icon. Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed. 303 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 304 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® HondaLink® HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®. 2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 309 2 Phone Setup P. 400 ■ HondaLink® Menu 1HondaLink® The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM or Android AutoTM, HondaLink® can only be connected through Wi-Fi. Features ■ Places * Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to the found locations via the navigation. ■ Vehicle Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service. ■ Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center. 304 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 305 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ Messages from Honda Displays helpful and important information from Honda. ■ Weather * Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can change the ZIP Code at any time. ■ To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service. ■ To enable the HondaLink® service Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Clock/Info. 4. Select the HondaLink tab. 5. Select Diagnostics & Location Data. 6. Select On. You need to allow the consent of the location service to enable the HondaLink® service. Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt shows again next time.) Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) Cancel: Does not allow this consent. * Not available on all models Continued 305 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 306 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ To link with HondaLink® You can see the Connection Guide screen after launching HondaLink®. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK. Features 306 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 307 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® ■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A message appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area. u When the message is received, a notification ring can be heard. 2. A message icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read. Continued Features Message Icon (yellow) 307 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 308 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink® 3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to see the messages. Features 308 4. Select a new message to open. u If you have selected the update option for HondaLink®, follow the directions on the screen to complete the process. 1Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips When you update HondaLink®, you must keep the engine running and maintain a constant connection with HondaLink®. If the update is interrupted, the system will automatically resume the process. If, however, a week has elapsed since the process was first interrupted, you must repeat the process from the beginning. You can update HondaLink® by selecting Message from Honda on the HondaLink® menu. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 309 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection Wi-Fi Connection You can connect the display audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup. ■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) Continued You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode. Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data subscription package. Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity. You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on Wi-Fi Device List. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen. Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Wi-Fi tab. 5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On. 6. Select Wi-Fi Device List. u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. u Select the phone you want to connect to the system. u If you do not find the phone you want to connect in the list, select Scan. 1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) 309 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 310 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection 7. Select Connect. u Enter a password for your phone, and select Done. u When the connection is successful, the icon is displayed on the list. 8. Select to go back to the home screen. ■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) Features 310 Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode. 1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made) iPhone users You may need to go through an initial setup for WiFi connection again after you boot your phone. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 311 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri® Eyes Free Siri® Eyes Free You can talk to Siri® using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) System. 1Siri® Eyes Free Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri®. We recommend against using Siri® other than in Siri® Eyes Free while operating a vehicle. ■ Using Siri® Eyes Free 1Using Siri® Eyes Free Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps. Features Appears when Siri® is activated in Siri® Eyes Free While in Siri® Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear. (Talk) Button Press and hold until the display changes as shown. (Hang-up/back) Button Press to deactivate Siri®. 311 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 312 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM Apple CarPlayTM If you connect an Apple CarPlayTM-compatible iPhone to the system via the 1.5A USB port, you can use the audio/information touch screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages. 1Apple CarPlayTM Only iPhone5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlayTM and when launching any compatible apps. To use Apple CarPlayTM, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port located in the center console storage will not enable Apple CarPlayTM operation. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 Features To directly access the Apple CarPlayTM phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlayTM, calls are only made through Apple CarPlayTM. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Apple CarPlayTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone. 2 Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM P. 314 When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlayTM, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlayTM is connected. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlayTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage. 312 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 313 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM ■ Apple CarPlayTM Menu Home Screen Apple CarPlayTM Icon 1Apple CarPlayTM Apple CarPlay TM Apple CarPlayTM Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlayTM requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply. Menu Select the Honda Icon to return to the Home Go back to the Apple CarPlayTM menu screen. screen. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlayTM. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps. ■ Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you. Features ■ Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail. Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlayTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlayTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlayTM performance or functionality. ■ Music Play music stored on your iPhone. ■ Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone. Models with navigation system Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlayTM map) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. Continued 313 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 314 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM ■ Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM After you have connected your iPhone to the system via USB, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlayTM. Use of Apple CarPlayTM will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlayTM experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information touch screen. ■ Enabling Apple CarPlayTM Features • Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.) • Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) • Cancel: Does not allow this consent. You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu. 314 1Setting Up Apple CarPlayTM You can also use the method below to set up Apple CarPlayTM: Select HOMESettingsSmartphoneApple CarPlay. Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlayTM is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple’s Privacy Policy. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 315 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlayTM ■ Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri® Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri®. 1Operating Apple CarPlayTM with Siri® Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri®. • What movies are playing today? • Call dad at work. • What song is this? • How's the weather tomorrow? • Read my latest email. • Find a table for four tonight in Chicago. For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri. Features (Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri®. Press again to deactivate Siri®. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. 315 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 316 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM Android AutoTM When you connect an Android phone to the Display Audio system via the 1.5A USB port, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated. When connected via Android AutoTM, you can use the audio/information touch screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android AutoTM, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android AutoTM. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 318 1Android AutoTM To use Android AutoTM, you need to download the Android AutoTM app from Google Play to your smartphone. Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android AutoTM. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android AutoTM phone. Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android AutoTM and when launching any compatible apps. Features To use Android AutoTM, connect the USB cable to the 1.5A USB port. The USB port in the center console storage will not enable Android AutoTM operation. 2 USB Port(s) P. 229 To directly access the Android AutoTM phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Android AutoTM, calls are only made through Android AutoTM. If you want to make a call with Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®, turn Android AutoTM OFF or detach the USB cable from your Android phone. 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 318 When your Android phone is connected to Android AutoTM, it is not possible to use Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android AutoTM is connected. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 316 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 317 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM ■ Android AutoTM Menu 1Android AutoTM 6 For details on countries and regions where Android AutoTM is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android AutoTM homepage. Android AutoTM Operating Requirements & Limitations Android AutoTM requires a compatible Android phone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier’s rate plans will apply. : Go back to the home screen. Android AutoTM Icon Models with navigation system Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android AutoTM) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination. The audio/Information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination. b Phone (Communication) Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail. c Google Now (Home screen) Display useful information organized by Android AutoTM into simple cards that appear just when they’re needed. d Music and audio Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android AutoTM. To switch between music apps, press this icon. e Go back to the home screen f Voice Operate Android AutoTM with your voice. Continued Features Maps (Navigation) Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs. a Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android AutoTM functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android AutoTM functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android AutoTM performance or functionality. It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android AutoTM. Refer to the Android AutoTM homepage for information on compatible apps. 317 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 318 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM ■ Auto Pairing Connection 1Enabling Android AutoTM When you connect an Android phone to the unit via USB, Android AutoTM is automatically initiated. ■ Enabling Android AutoTM • Enable once: Allows only once. (Prompt shows again next time.) • Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt does not show again.) • Cancel: Does not allow this consent. Features 318 You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone settings menu. Only initialize Android AutoTM when you are safely parked. When Android AutoTM first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone. You can use the method below to change Android AutoTM settings after you have completed the initial setup: Select HOMESettingsSmartphoneAndroid Auto. Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android AutoTM is governed by Google’s Privacy Policy. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 319 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid AutoTM ■ Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition Press and hold the talk button to operate Android AutoTM with your voice. 1Operating Android AutoTM with Voice Recognition Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition: • Reply to text. • Call my wife. • Navigate to Honda. • Play my music. • Send a text message to my wife. • Call flower shop. For more information, please refer to the Android AutoTM homepage. Features (Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android AutoTM with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system. You can also activate the voice recognition function by pressing the icon in the upper-right corner of the screen. (Hang-up/back) button: Press to deactivate voice recognition. 319 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 320 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM Legal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM ■ OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY. Features 320 USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 321 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuLegal Information on Apple CarPlayTM/Android AutoTM ■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY Features YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. 321 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 322 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio System Basic OperationuAbout Open Source Licenses About Open Source Licenses To see the open source license information, follow these steps. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Detail Info. 6. Select About device. 7. Select Legal information. 8. Select Open source licenses. 1About Open Source Licenses LICENCE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: Features The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 322 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 323 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Audio Error Messages CD Player * If a disc error occurs, you may see the following error messages. Error Message Unplayable File Bad Disc Please check owners manual. Push Eject Cause Track/file format not supported Mechanical error • Current track/file will be skipped. The next supported track/file plays automatically. • Press the (eject) button and remove the disc, and check that the error message is cleared. • Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed, and insert the disc again. 2 Protecting CDs P. 331 Mecha Error Servo error Check Disc Disc error Heat Error High temperature • If the error message reappears, press the button, and pull out the disc. • Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. • If the error message repeats, or the disc cannot be removed, contact a dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player. Features Bad Disc Please check owners manual. * Not available on all models Solution • Check that the disc is not damaged or deformed. 2 Protecting CDs P. 331 • Turn the audio system off and allow the player to cool down until the error message is cleared. 323 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 324 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive iPod/USB Flash Drive If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Features USB Error Appears when there is a problem with the USB adapter unit. Check if the device is compatible with the USB adapter unit. A charging error has occurred with the connected USB device. When safe please check the compatibility of the device and USB cable and try again*1 Bad USB Device*2 Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. Unsupported Version*1 Unsupported Ver*2 Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version. Connect Retry*1 Retry Connection*2 Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod. Unplayable File Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are DRM or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about 3 seconds, then plays the next song. *1:Display audio system *2:Color audio system 324 Solution 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 325 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive Error Message Solution iPod Appears when the iPod is empty. No Data*1, *2 USB No Song*2 iPod No Song*2 USB flash drive Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in the USB flash drive. iPod and USB flash drive Check that compatible files are stored on the device. Unsupported Features *1:Display audio system *2:Color audio system Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device. 325 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 326 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® U.S. models Models with display audio system Pandora® If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message Solution No active station. Please select one. Unable to rate this track. Please try again. You've reached your skip limit. Oops! Your station list is full. Please delete an existing station in order to add more. • Appears when the number of stations that can be created is exceeded. Follow the message. Features Unable to create new station. Please try again. Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later. Unable to save bookmark. Try again later. 326 • Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device to create a station. • Appears when the commanded operation is failed. Try again later. This Pandora station is currently not available. Please select another station. • Appears when the station you selected is not available. Change a station, or try again later. Unable to play Pandora. When stopped, log-in to Pandora. • Appears when you have not logged into Pandora®. Follow the message. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 327 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® Error Message Solution Unable to connect to Pandora. When stopped, check your mobile phone. No Internet Connection. Pandora will automatically resume when the connection is restored. • Appears when failed to connect. Check your device and try again. Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later. Connect Retry • Appears when you travel outside the Pandora® service coverage areas. Pandora® can only be played in U.S. and will not work in other countries. Unsupported • Appears when the device is not supported. Use another device. Features Unable to play Pandora in this country. Unsupported Version Pandora app version is unsupported. When stopped, please update the app. • Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update Pandora® to the latest version. Unable to connect to the device. Please make sure the phone’s Bluetooth setting is ON and try again. • Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check the Bluetooth status on your device. No Data • Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated. Reboot the app and reconnect the device. A charging error has occurred with the connected USB device. When safe please check the compatibility of the device and USB cable and try again. • Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn the audio system off, and turn it again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error. 327 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 328 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps Models with display audio system Android/Apps If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer. Error Message*1 Unfortunately, **** has stopped. Solution Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app. Unless it is a fatal error, it would return to normal if you startup the app. If it does not return to normal even after starting up the app, press and hold the (power) button to perform the forced reset. If it still does not get back to normal, you need Factory Data Reset. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 366 Features **** is not responding. Would you like to close it? App is in a busy state. Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. When it does not return to normal, press and hold the (power) button to perform the forced reset. You also need Factory Data Reset. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 366 *1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error occurs. 328 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 329 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 General Information on the Audio System SiriusXM® Radio Service * ■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID in the display: Select Channel 000. 2. Have your radio ID and credit card number ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe. ■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio ■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages Check antenna: The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected or shorted. Contact a dealer. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Channel Not Subscribed: You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. Replay Memory Almost Full: The recording memory is nearly full. Replay Memory Full: The recording memory is full. * Not available on all models Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio: • U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/ subscribenow or 1-866-635-2349 • Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/ subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079 1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances: • In a location with an obstruction to the south of your vehicle. • In tunnels • On the lower level of a multi-tiered road • Large items carried on the roof rack Features Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel, or through the audio/informations screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception. 1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio 329 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 330 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs * Recommended CDs * • Use only high-quality CD-R or CD-RW discs labeled for audio use. • Use only CD-R or CD-RW discs on which the recordings are closed. • Play only standard round-shaped CDs. The CD packages or jackets should have one of these marks. ■ CDs with MP3, WMA, or AAC files Features 330 • Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. • Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported. * Not available on all models 1Recommended CDs * A Dual-disc cannot play on this audio unit. If recorded under certain conditions, a CD-R or CD-RW may not play either. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 331 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuRecommended CDs * ■ Protecting CDs Follow these precautions when handling or storing CDs: • Store a CD in its case when it is not being played. • When wiping a CD, use a soft clean cloth from the center to the outside edge. • Handle a CD by its edge. Never touch either surface. • Never insert foreign objects into the CD player. • Keep CDs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat. • Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the CD. • Avoid fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens on the CD. 1Protecting CDs NOTICE Do not insert a damaged CD. It may be stuck inside and damage the audio unit. Examples: ● Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick CDs Bubbled/ Wrinkled ● Using Printer Label Kit Sealed With Plastic Ring ● Poor quality Damaged CDs CDs Chipped/ Cracked Small CDs Warped Features ● With Label/ Sticker Burrs 3-inch (8-cm) CD 331 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 332 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives ■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility Model iPod (5th generation) iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007) iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008) iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009) iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012 iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012 iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s*1/iPhone 5c*1/ iPhone 6*1/iPhone 6 plus*1/iPhone 6s*1/iPhone 6s plus*1 This system may not work with all software versions of these devices. Features *1:Display audio system ■ USB Flash Drives • • • • • 332 1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. Some digital audio players may not be compatible. Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported. 1USB Flash Drives Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 333 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Honda App License Agreement ■ END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS “AGREEMENT”) WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR “VEHICLE”) AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE “SERVICES”). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., (“HONDA,” “US,” “WE,” OR “OUR”), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO “HONDA” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA’S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A “PROVIDER”). REFERENCE TO A “PROVIDER” IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER’S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. Features A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a “DEALER”). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “HONDA SERVICES”); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, “PROVIDER SERVICES”), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services. B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT. 2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the “HONDA TERMS”). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE. Continued 333 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 334 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA’s distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE. Features 4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the “PROVIDER TERMS”). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE. 5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any “DOCUMENTATION”). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. 334 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 335 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Features (b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not: (1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else’s use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses. 6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers. Continued 335 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 336 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments. C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA. Features 2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver’s license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information. 3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES. 4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content. 336 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 337 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties’) use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE. 7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void. Features 6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA’s discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle’s current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed (“VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION”) to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent. Continued 337 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 338 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices. Features 3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process. 4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash. 338 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 339 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you. 2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information. Features (a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE (“VEHICLE INFORMATION”) to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals. (b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle’s geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS. (c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES’s multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE’s multimedia system is your sole responsibility. Continued 339 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 340 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Features F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE’s multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE” BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you. G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney’s fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. 340 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 341 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement 2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length. Features (a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES. H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES. Continued 341 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 342 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE’s compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. Features J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION. K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. 2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION. 342 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 343 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Continued Features M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act (“FAA”) applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. “Claim” means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. “Claim” does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous. 343 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 344 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out. Features 344 N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA’s prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 345 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Customized Features Models with color audio system 1Customized Features Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. ■ How to customize While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w , press the MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings, press the button, then select Phone Setup. Audio/Information Screen When you customize settings: • Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. • Shift to (P . 1How to customize These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter. (Phone) Button Features To customize other features, select Settings, rotate , then press . 2 List of customizable options P. 349 MENU/CLOCK Button Selector Knob Continued 345 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 346 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ Customization Flow Press the MENU/CLOCK button. Adjust Clock Settings Bluetooth Add New Device Connect an Audio Device Display Adjustment Features Contrast Black Level Rear Camera 346 Brightness Camera Guideline 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 347 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Display Change Audio Wallpaper Wallpaper Select Import Delete Features Color Theme Blue Red Amber Gray Language Clock Format 12h 24h Continued 347 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 348 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Press the button and rotate to select Phone Setup, then press Bluetooth Setup . Add New Device Connect a Phone Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key Features Speed Dial Ringtone Fixed Mobile Phone Caller ID Info Name Priority Number Priority System Clear 348 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 349 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features Description Selectable Settings Adjusts the clock. Adjust Clock — 2 Clock P. 134 Add New Device Bluetooth Display Contrast Adjustment Black Level Camera Guideline Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen. Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen. Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen. Selects whether the guidelines come on the audio/information screen. — — Features Brightness Rear Camera — 2 Phone Setup P. 376 Connect an Audio Device Settings Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a paired phone, and create a code for a paired phone. — — On*1/Off *1:Default Setting Continued 349 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 350 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Display Change Select Wallpaper Delete Settings Color Theme Language Features 350 Import Clock Format *1:Default Setting Description Changes the display type. Changes the wallpaper type. Selectable Settings Audio*1/Wallpaper Clock*1/Image1/Image2/ Image3 Imports an image file for a new wallpaper. — 2 Wallpaper Setup P. 237 Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Changes the background color of the audio/ information screen. Changes the display language. Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. Image1*1/Image2/Image3 Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray English*1/Français/Español 12h*1/24h 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 351 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Add New Device Connect a Phone Bluetooth Setup Phone Setup Ringtone Caller ID Info System Clear Selectable Settings Pairs a new phone to HFL. — 2 Phone Setup P. 376 Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone to HFL. — 2 Phone Setup P. 376 Connect an Audio Device Disconnect All Devices Delete Device Pass-Key Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL. — Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. Deletes a paired phone. Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone. Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry. — — — — 2 Speed Dial P. 383 Selects the ring tone. Fixed /Mobile Phone Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number as the caller ID. Priority Cancels/Resets all customized items in the — Phone Setup group as default. *1 Features Speed Dial Description *1:Default Setting 351 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 352 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Customized Features Models with display audio system 1Customized Features Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features. ■ How to customize With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, select Settings, then select a setting item. Features Audio/Information Screen *1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 352 When you customize settings: • Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. • Shift to (P . To customize other features, select Settings. 2 List of customizable options P. 358 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 353 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ Customization Flow Select . Clock/Info Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Adjustment Auto Time Zone * Manual Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Clock Format Clock Display Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset HondaLink Diagnostic & Location Data Other Info Screen Preference Select Settings. Clock Wallpaper Features Clock Default Phone Phone Bluetooth Device List Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync Auto Phone Call Transfer HondaLink Assist Text Messages Enable Text Messages New Message Notification Default * Not available on all models Continued 353 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 354 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Audio Common Bluetooth Device List Sound CoverArt Audio Source Pop-Up FM/AM HD Radio Mode (FM) * HD Radio Mode (AM) * RDS INFO SXM * TuneStart SportsFlash Setup Features Traffic & Weather Setup Multiple Channel Mix Preset Default Camera Rear Camera Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline LaneWatch * Show with Turn Signal Display Time after Turn Signal Off Reference Line Default *1 : May change depending on your currently selected source. 354 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 355 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu System HOME Home Screen Edit Order Display Display Settings Brightness Contrast Black Level Background Color Blue Amber Red Violet Blue Green Features Sound/Beep Guidance Volume Text Message Volume Voice Recog. Volume Verbal Reminder Beep Volume Voice Recog. * Not available on all models Voice Prompt Voice Recog. Volume Song by Voice * Song by Voice Phonetic Modification * Phone book Phonetic Modification Automatic Phone Sync One Press Voice Operation Continued 355 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 356 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu System Clock Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Adjustment Auto Time Zone * Manual Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Clock Format Clock Display Features Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset Other Language Remember Last Screen Memory Refresh Refresh Time Adjustment Touch Panel Sensitivity Detail Information Factory Data Reset Default 356 * Not available on all models Clock Wallpaper 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 357 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Bluetooth/Wi-Fi Bluetooth Bluetooth On/Off Status Bluetooth Device List Edit Pairing Code Wi-Fi Wi-Fi On/Off Status Wi-Fi Device List Default Smartphone Features Wi-Fi Information Apple CarPlay Android Auto Continued 357 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 358 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu ■ List of customizable options Setup Group Customizable Features Description Clock Changes the clock display type. Selectable Settings Analog/Digital*1/Small Digital/Off Clock/Wallpaper Type • Changes the wallpaper type. Galaxy*1/Metallic/Time • Imports an image file for a new Wallpaper Zone/Blank wallpaper. • Deletes an image file for a wallpaper. Adjusts clock. Clock Adjustment — 2 Adjusting the Clock P. 134 Features Auto Time Zone Clock Clock/Info Manual Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time HondaLink *1:Default Setting 358 * Not available on all models Clock Format Clock Display Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset Diagnostic & Location Data * Automatically adjusts the clock when driving through On*1/Off different time zones. Changes the time zone manually. Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to cancel this function. Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H. Selects whether the clock display comes on. — On*1/Off Resets the clock settings to the factory default. 12H*1/24H On*1/Off Upper Right*1/Upper Left/ Lower Right/Lower Left/Off Yes/No Turns HondaLink® on and off. On/Off*1 Changes the clock display layout. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 359 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Other Clock/Info Info Screen Preference Default Bluetooth Device List Phone Phone Text Messages Default Selectable Settings Selects the top menu when the button is pressed. Info Top/Info Menu/Off*1 • Info Top- A brief menu pops up. • Info Menu- A full menu pops up. • Off- A menu does not pop up. Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Clock/ Yes/No Info settings group as default. Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or disconnects a — paired phone. 2 Phone Setup P. 400 Selects the ring tone. Sets a phonebook and call history data to be Automatic Phone automatically imported when a phone is paired to Sync HFL. Auto Phone Call Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone Transfer to HFL when you enter the vehicle. HondaLink Assist Turns HondaLink Assist on and off. Enable Text Turns the text message function on and off. Messages New Message Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen Notification when HFL receives a new text message. Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone settings group as default. Fixed/Mobile Phone*1 On*1/Off Features Ring Tone Description On*1/Off On/Off*1 On*1/Off On/Off Yes/No *1:Default Setting Continued 359 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 360 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Bluetooth Device List Sound Description Selectable Settings Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired phone. — 2 Phone Setup P. 400 Adjusts the settings of the audio speaker’s sound. 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 271 Common -6 ~ 0*1 ~ +6 (BASS, MIDDLE, and TREBLE), RR9~0*1~FR9 (FADER), L9~0*1~R9 (BALANCE), Off/ Low/Mid*1/High (SVC) iPod, USB mode Features [Your selected media] Cover Art Audio Audio Source Pop-Up HD Radio Mode (FM) * FM/AM mode FM/AM HD Radio Mode (AM) * RDS Info *1:Default Setting 360 * Not available on all models Turns the cover art display on and off. Selects whether the list of selectable audio source comes on when Audio is selected on the home screen. Selects whether the FM radio automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analog waves only. Selects whether the AM radio automatically switches to the digital radio waves or receives the analog waves only. Turns on and off the RDS information. On*1/Off On/Off*1 Auto *1/Analog Only Auto*1/Analog Only On/Off*1 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 361 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Description SiriusXM® mode Audio SXM * Default Camera Rear Camera Default On*1/Off Off/On(one time)/ On(continue)*1 — On*1/Off — Features Turns on and off, starts the song from the beginning as you change preset stations. Turns on and off the sports alert Interrupt function. Favorite Selects your favorite sports teams. SportsFlash Setup 2 Live Sports Alert P. 287 Team Interrupt Causes the system to beep when the Beep sports alert is notified. Traffic & Weather Selects the region you want to receive the Setup information. Multiple Channel Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off. Mix Preset Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio settings group as default. Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the rear Fixed Guideline camera monitor. TuneStart Selectable Settings On/Off*1 Yes/No On*1/Off 2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 511 Dynamic Guideline Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the movement of the steering wheel. On*1/Off 2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 511 Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear Camera setting group as default. Yes/No *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 361 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 362 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a right turn. Changes the length of time the LaneWatch display Display Time after stays on after the turn signal lever returns to the Turn Signal Off center. Selects whether the reference lines come on the Reference Line LaneWatch monitor. Cancels/Resets all customized items in the LaneWatch group as default. Home Screen Edit Changes the HOME screen icon layout. Order Changes the brightness of the audio/ Brightness information screen. Changes the contrast of the audio/ Display Settings Contrast information screen. Black Changes the black level of the audio/ Level information screen. Changes the background color of the audio/ Background Color information screen. Show with Turn Signal LaneWatch * Camera Default Features HOME System Display *1:Default Setting 362 * Not available on all models Description Selectable Settings On*1/Off 0 second*1/2 seconds On*1/Off Yes/No — — — — Blue*1/Amber/Red/Violet/ BlueGreen 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 363 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Sound/ Beep Voice Recog. Changes the sound volume. Guidance Volume Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation system. Text Message Changes the text message reading volume. Volume Voice Recog. Changes the volume of the voice prompt. Volume Verbal Reminder Turns the verbal reminders on and off. Beep Volume Changes the beep volume. Voice Prompt Turns the voice prompt on and off. Voice Recog. Changes the volume of the voice prompt. Volume Song by Voice * Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off. Song by Voice Modifies a voice command for music stored in the Phonetic system or an iPod/iPhone. 2 Phonetic Modification P. 295 Modification* Phone book Modifies a voice command for the phonebook. Phonetic 2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 409 Modification Sets phonebook and call history data to be Automatic Phone automatically imported when a phone is paired to Sync HFL. One Press Voice Changes the setting of the (Talk) button Operation operation when using the voice operation. Selectable Settings 1~6*1~11 1~6*1~11 1~6*1~11 On*1/Off Off/1/2*1/3 On*1/Off Features System Description 1~6*1~11 On*1/Off — — On*1/Off On*1/Off *1:Default Setting * Not available on all models Continued 363 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 364 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Clock Features System Clock/Wallpaper Type Clock Adjustment Auto Time Zone * Manual Time Zone Auto Daylight Saving Time Clock Format Clock Display Overlay Clock Location Clock Reset Language Remember Last Screen Memory Refresh Other Refresh Time Adjustment Touch Panel Sensitivity Detail Information Description Selectable Settings Clock Wallpaper See Clock/Info on P. 358 Change the display language. English*1/Francais/Espanol Selects whether the device remembers the last On/Off*1 screen. Turns on the audio system automatically and restores the fragmentation of a memory when the ignition On*1/Off switch is LOCK (0 *2. Sets the time for Memory Refresh. Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen. — High/Low*1 Displays the details of the head unit and operating system information. *1:Default Setting *2: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch 364 * Not available on all models — 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 365 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized Featuresu Setup Group Customizable Features Other System Factory Data Reset Resets all the settings to their factory default. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 366 Cancels/Resets all customized items in the System group as default. Default Bluetooth Description Bluetooth On/Off Changes the Bluetooth® status. Status Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a paired Bluetooth Device phone. List Selectable Settings Yes/No Yes/No On*1/Off — 2 Phone Setup P. 400 Edit Pairing Code Edits a pairing code. 2 To change the pairing code setting P. 401 Wi-Fi On/Off Changes the Wi-Fi mode. Status Wi-Fi Wi-Fi Device List Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi device. Wi-Fi Information Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit. Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Default Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default. Apple CarPlay Sets up the Apple CarPlayTM connection. Smartphone Android Auto Sets up the Android AutoTM connection. Random/Fixed*1 On/Off*1 Features Bluetooth/ Wi-Fi — — Yes/No — — *1:Default Setting 365 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 366 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings Defaulting All the Settings Features 366 Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Others tab. 5. Select Factory Data Reset. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 6. Select Yes to reset the settings. 7. Select Yes again to reset the settings. u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select OK. u After selecting OK, the system will reboot. 1Defaulting All the Settings When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data. If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default. If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line. 2 HondaLink® P. 304 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 367 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems. ■ Important Safety Precautions 1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver * Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an “electronic eye,” or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it. Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer. Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage. * Not available on all models Features When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door’s path. 367 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 368 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink Training HomeLink If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: • Press and hold the I and III HomeLink buttons for about 10 seconds, until the green indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1. • If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1. Indicator I HomeLink Button III HomeLink Button Features 368 The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 369 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver * uTraining HomeLink ■ Programming a Button 1Training HomeLink 1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange? NO YES 4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work? YES 3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds. NO 5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. Training Complete HomeLink LED is continuously on green. 6. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate. Training Complete HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green. 5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the “learn” button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener). 5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash orange. This should take about 20 seconds. 2. Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under “programming a button.” Erasing Button Memory To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all programming before selling the vehicle. Features 3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds. Reprogramming a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure: Operating To operate, simple press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device. Questions For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. 369 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 370 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with color audio system 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Using HFL ■ HFL Buttons To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876. Voice control tips Volume up Volume down • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the Microphone Features (Phone) Button (Talk) Button (Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button Selector Knob (Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up/Back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press . windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone. • Press and release the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. • If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. • To change the volume level, use the audio system’s volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel. State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle. If you receive a call while using the audio system, the system resumes its operation after ending the call. Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled. 2 Speed Dial P. 383 Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled. 370 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 371 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ HFL Status Display Battery Level Status 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. Signal Strength Roam Status Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. HFL Mode Call Name Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models. ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Features 1HFL Status Display You can change the system language to English, French, or Spanish. 2 Customized Features P. 345 Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion. 2 Speed Dial P. 383 371 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 372 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL. To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. or Phone Speed Dial*1 Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled. Add New Features (Existing entry list) Call History*1 Call History Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Dialed Calls Display the last 20 outgoing calls. Received Calls Display the last 20 incoming calls. Missed Calls Display the last 20 missed calls. Phonebook*1 Display the paired phones’s phonebook. Dial*1 Enter a phone number to dial. *1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 372 1HFL Menus 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 373 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Redial*1 Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history. Phone Setup Bluetooth Setup Pair a phone to the system. Connect a Phone Connect a phone to the system. Connect an Audio Device Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the system. Disconnect All Devices Disconnect a paired phone from the system. Delete Device Delete a previously paired phone. Pass-Key Create a code for a paired phone. Features Add New Device *1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. Continued 373 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 374 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Speed Dial*1 Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Phone Number Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Features Existing entry list Change Speed Dial *1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL. 374 Add New Call History Change a previously stored speed dial number. Delete Speed Dial Delete a previously stored speed dial number. Store Voice Tag Create a voice tag for a speed dial number. Change Voice Tag Change a voice tag for a speed dial number. Delete Voice Tag Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 375 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Ringtone Caller ID Info Select the ring tone stored in HFL. Mobile Phone Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone. Name Priority Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID. Number Priority Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the caller ID. Features System Clear Fixed Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries, and security codes. Continued 375 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 376 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup ■ To pair a cell phone (No phone has Features been paired to the system) 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 3. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode, then press . u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. 4. When your phone appears on the list, select it by pressing . u If your phone doesn’t appear, select Phone Not Found? and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select HandsFreeLink. 5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. 6. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful. 376 Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is connected to HFL. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following: : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 377 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Change the currently paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . You can pair a phone in the following steps. Phone Setup  Bluetooth Setup  Add New Device  confirmation message  Yes  confirmation message  OK  Select a Phone  pairing code. Features 4. Rotate to select Connect a Phone, then press . u The screen changes to a device list. 1Phone Setup 5. Rotate to select a desired device name, then press . u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone. Continued 377 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 378 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the pairing code setting 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . 4. Rotate . to select Pass-Key, then press Features 5. Input a new pairing code, then press 378 . 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 379 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Bluetooth Setup, then press . Features 4. Rotate to select Delete Device, then press . u The screen changes to a device list. 5. Rotate to select a phone you want to delete, then press . 6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Continued 379 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 380 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Ring Tone You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Ringtone, then press . 4. Rotate to select Fixed or Mobile Phone, then press . Features 380 ■ Caller’s ID Information You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming call. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Caller ID Info, then press . 4. Rotate to select a mode you want, then press . 1Ring Tone Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the speakers. 1Caller’s ID Information Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is stored in the phonebook. Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is displayed. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 381 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Clear the System Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select System Clear, then press . 4. Rotate to select Yes, then press . Features 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 6. A notification appears on the screen. Press . Continued 381 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 382 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL. 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name. Pref Fax Home Car Mobile Other Work Voice Features Pager If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears instead of category icons. On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL. The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call. 382 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 383 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial Cha Change hange ge Sp Speed eed Dial Delete Speed Dial D lete Del ete t Sp S eed d Di ia all You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to store a speed dial number: 1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button during a call. 2. The contact information for the active call will be stored for the corresponding speed dial. When a voice tag is stored, you can press the button and call the number using voice commands. Features Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select Add New, then press . 4. Rotate to select a place to choose a number from, then press . From Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook. From Phone Number: u Input the number manually. 5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Rotate to select Yes or No, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to say the name for the speed dial entry. Continued 383 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 384 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a speed dial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Speed Dial, then press . 6. Select a new speed dial number, then press . Features 384 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 385 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag Delete Speed Del ete Sp peed ee Di Dial al ■ To change a voice tag 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Change Voice Tag, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. Continued 1Speed Dial Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag. It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.” Features Change Cha nge e Sp Speed peed ee Di Dial al dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Store Voice Tag, then press . 6. Using the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 385 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 386 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a voice tag Features Change Speed Dial Delete Speed Dial Store Voice Tag 386 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Voice Tag, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . ■ To delete a speed dial number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phone Setup, then press . 3. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 4. Select an existing speed dial entry. 5. Rotate to select Delete Speed Dial, then press . u A confirmation message appears on the screen. Rotate to select Yes, then press . 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 387 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a Call 1Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial. Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. The maximum range between your phone and vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters). Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. Features Continued 387 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 388 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the imported Features phonebook When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Phonebook, then press . 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically. Rotate to select the initial, then press . 4. Rotate to select a name, then press . 5. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. ■ To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press . 4. Rotate to select , then press . u Dialing starts automatically. 388 1To make a call using the imported phonebook This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 371 2 Speed Dial P. 383 1To make a call using a phone number This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving. However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 371 2 Speed Dial P. 383 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 389 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using redial 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Redial, then press u Dialing starts automatically. 1To make a call using redial . Continued 1To make a call using the call history The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls. Features ■ To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by Dialed Calls, Received Calls, and Missed Calls. 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Call History, then press . 3. Rotate to select Dialed Calls, Received Calls, or Missed Calls, then press . 4. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. Press and hold the button to redial the last number dialed in your phone’s call history. 389 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 390 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using a speed dial entry 1. Press the button or the button. 2. Rotate to select Speed Dial, then press . 3. Rotate to select a number, then press . u Dialing starts automatically. 1To make a call using a speed dial entry On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the list can be directly selected by pressing the corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6). Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed dial list. When a voice tag is stored, press the button and call the number using voice commands. 2 Speed Dial P. 383 Features 390 Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 391 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call HFL Mode 1Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call screen appears. Press the Press the button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call. Caller’s Name Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call. Continued Features You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Rotate to select the icon, then press . 391 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 392 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Options During a Call Features 392 The following options are available during a call. Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone. Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. 1. To view the available options, press the button. 2. Rotate to select the option, then press . u The check box is checked when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off. 1Options During a Call Dial Tones: Available on some phones. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 393 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Models with display audio system 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® The Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone. Place your phone where you can get good reception. To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876. Using HFL ■ HFL Buttons (Menu) Button Volume down Volume up SOURCE Button Button Voice control tips • Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphones. • Press the button when you want to call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and naturally after a beep. • If the microphones pick up voices other than yours, the command may be misinterpreted. • To change the volume level, use the audio system's volume knob or the remote audio controls on the steering wheel. (Talk) Button Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled. 2 Speed Dial P. 406 (Hang-up/Back) Button (Pick-up) Button Continued Features To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status setting must be On. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM, HFL is unavailable. 2 Customized Features P. 352 Microphone 393 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 394 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL Features 394 (Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone screen, or to answer an incoming call. (Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous command, or cancel a command. (Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag. (Menu) button: Press and hold to display Speed Dial, Call History, or Redial on the phone screen. button: Press to select an item displayed on the phone screen. SOURCE button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone screen. To go to the Phone Menu screen: 1. Select . 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen. 3. Select . 1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® Up to five call histories can be displayed among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 395 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL ■ HFL Status Display 1HFL Status Display The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call. Battery Level Status Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL. The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models. You can change the system language. 2 Customized Features P. 352 Roaming Status HFL Mode Caller’s Name Signal Strength Caller’s Number Features ■ Limitations for Manual Operation Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped. Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion. 2 Speed Dial P. 406 395 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 396 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus HFL Menus The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use the system. To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked. ■ Phone settings screen 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Phone. Some functions are limited while driving. Features Phone Bluetooth Device List Connect: Connect: Connect: (Existing entry list) Add Bluetooth Device Connect a paired device to the system. Disconnect Disconnect a paired phone from the system. Delete Delete a previously paired phone. Pair a new phone to the system. *1 : Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 396 1HFL Menus 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 397 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Ring Tone Automatic Phone Sync Auto Phone Call Transfer HondaLink Assist Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL. Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. Turn HondaLink Assist on and off. Enable Text Messages New Message Notification Default Features Text Messages Select the fixed or cell phone. Turn the text message function on and off. Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL receives a new text message. Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default. Continued 397 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 398 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Menu screen 1. Select . 2. Select Phone. 3. Select . Speed Dial (Existing entry list) Features New Entry Dial the selected number in the speed dial list. Manual Input Import from Call History Edit Speed Dial New Entry Import from Phonebook Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Manual Input Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Import from Call History Import from Phonebook (Existing entry list) Delete All 398 Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the call history to store as a speed dial number. Select a phone number from the phonebook to store as a speed dial number. Dial the selected number in the speed dial list. Delete all of the previously stored speed dial number. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 399 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus Phonebook Display the paired phone’s phonebook. Redial Redial the last number dialed. Dial Enter a phone number to dial. Call History All Display the last outgoing calls. Received Display the last incoming calls. Features Missed Text Messages Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Dialed Display the last missed calls. (Existing message list) Read/Stop System reads received message aloud, or stop message from being read. See the previous message. See the next message. Reply Call Reply to a received message using one of six fixed phrases. Make a call to the sender. Continued 399 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 400 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phone Setup 1Phone Setup ■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no Features 400 phone paired to the system) 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Yes. 3. Make sure your phone is search or discoverable mode, then select Continue. u HFL automatically searches for a Bluetooth® device. 4. Select your phone when it appears on the list. u If your phone does not appear, you can select Refresh to search again. u If your phone still does not appear, select Phone Not Found and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, search for HandsFreeLink. 5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone. Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls. Phone Pairing Tips: • You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is moving. • Up to six phones can be paired. • Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is paired to the system. • If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and returns to idle. Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following: : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlayTM, pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed out from the Bluetooth Device List screen. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 401 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again. To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device from the Bluetooth Device List screen. 1To change the pairing code setting The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the setting. To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the current code, then enter a new one. Features 2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone to connect. u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone. 4. Select Connect , Connect , or Connect . ■ To change the pairing code setting 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth / Wi-Fi. 4. Select the Bluetooth tab. 5. Select Edit Pairing Code. 1To change the currently paired phone For a randomly generated pairing code each time you pair a phone, select Random. 6. Select Random or Fixed. Continued 401 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 402 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 2. Select Bluetooth Device List. 3. Select a phone you want to delete. Features 402 4. Select Delete. 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 403 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To Set Up Text Message Options 1To Set Up Text Message Options ■ To turn on or off the text message function 1. Go to the phone settings screen. To use the text message function, it may be necessary to set up on your phone. 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 2. Select Enable Text Messages. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select On or Off. ■ To turn on or off the text message 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 2. Select New Message Notification. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select On or Off. Continued 1To turn on or off the text message notice On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you receive a new message. Off: The message you receive is stored in the system without notification. Features notice 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 403 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 404 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Ring Tone 1Ring Tone You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 2. Select Ring Tone. 3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone. Features ■ Automatic Transferring If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL. 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select On or Off. 404 Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the speakers. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 405 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History ■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On: When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system. 1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to three category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name. Fax Home Car Mobile Other ■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync Work Voice setting 1. Go to the phone settings screen. Pager 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system. 2. Select Automatic Phone Sync. Features Pref The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call. 3. Select On or Off. Continued 405 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 406 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Speed Dial 1Speed Dial Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone. To store a speed dial number: 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 Features 2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select New Entry. 4. Select a place to choose a number. From Import from Call History: u Select a number from the call history. From Manual Input: u Input the number manually. From Import from Phonebook: u Select a number from the connected cell phone’s imported phonebook. 5. When the speed dial is successfully stored, you are asked to create a voice tag for the number. Select Yes or No. 6. Select Record to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. u Using the button, follow the prompts to store a voice tag for the speed dial entry. 406 When a voice tag is stored, press the button to call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag name. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 407 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed dial number 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Record. 5. Select Record, or use the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 1Speed Dial Avoid using duplicate voice tags. Avoid using “home” as a voice tag. It is easier for the system to recognise a longer name. For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.” Features ■ To delete a voice tag 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select Voice Tag. u From the pop-up menu, select Clear. 5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. Continued 407 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 408 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To edit a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen. AAAAA BBBBB CCCCC DDDDD EEEEE FFFFF 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Edit. 4. Select a setting you want. ■ To delete a speed dial 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 Features 408 2. Select Edit Speed Dial. 3. Select an existing speed dial entry. u From the pop-up menu, select Delete. 4. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 409 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification 1Phonebook Phonetic Modification Continued You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items. Features Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands. ■ To add a new voice tag 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to add phonetic modification to. 409 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 410 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 7. Select New Voice Tag. 8. Select a contact name you want to add to. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 9. Select Modify. 10. Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 11. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK. Features 410 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 411 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To modify a voice tag 1Phonebook Phonetic Modification Continued You can only modify or delete contact names for the currently connected phone. Features 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to modify phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to modify. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 8. Select Modify. 9. Using Record or the button, follow the prompts to complete the voice tag. 10. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select OK. 411 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 412 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To delete a modified voice tag Features 412 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification. 7. Select a contact name you want to delete. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 8. Select Delete. u The selected contact name has been selected. 9. Select OK. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 413 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus 1Making a Call Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from most screens. Press the button and say the voice tag name. Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers. While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlayTM, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlayTM. Features ■ To delete all modified voice tags 1. Select . 2. Select Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select the Voice Recog tab. 5. Select Phonebook Phonetic Modification. 6. Select the phone you want to delete phonetic modification. u The contact name list appears. 7. Select Delete All. 8. You will receive a confirmation message on the screen, then select Yes. ■ Making a Call You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial. Continued 413 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 414 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using the imported phonebook 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 1To make a call using the imported phonebook You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Speed Dial P. 406 2. Select Phonebook. 3. Select a name. u You can also search by letter. Select Search. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering letters. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. Features ■ To make a call using a phone number 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 2. Select Dial. 3. Select a number. u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers. 4. Select . u Dialing starts automatically. 414 1To make a call using a phone number You can call a stored voice-tagged speed dial number using voice commands. 2 Speed Dial P. 406 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 415 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To make a call using redial 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 1To make a call using redial Press and hold the number dialed. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 button to redial the last 2. Select Redial. u Dialing starts automatically. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 1To make a call using the Call History The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, received, or missed calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.) Features ■ To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Received, and Missed. 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2. Select Call History. 3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed. 4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. ■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry 1. Go to the phone menu screen. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 2. Select Speed Dial. 3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically. 1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry When a voice tag is stored, press the call the number using the voice tag. 2 Speed Dial P. 406 button to Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by voice from any screen. Press the button and follow the prompts. Continued 415 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 416 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Call 1Receiving a Call When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming call screen appears. Press the Press the button to answer the call. button to decline or end the call. Call Waiting Press the button to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Press the button again to return to the current call. Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Press the button if you want to hang up the current call. You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and buttons. Features ■ Options During a Call 1Options During a Call The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system. The available options are shown on the lower Mute Icon half of the screen. Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off. 416 Touch Tones: Available on some phones. You can select the icons on the audio/information screen. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 417 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Receiving a Text Message 1Receiving a Text Message The system does not display any received messages while you are driving. You can only hear them read aloud. The system can only receive messages that are sent as text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the data services will not be displayed in the list. With some phones, you may be able to display up to 20 most recent text messages. State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text message feature. Only use the text message feature when conditions allow you to do so safely. When you receive a text message for the first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are asked to turn the New Message Notification setting to On. 2 To turn on or off the text message notice P. 403 Continued Features HFL can display newly received text messages as well as 20 of the most recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase. 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new text message. 2. Select Read to listen to the message. u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading out the message. 3. To discontinue the message read-out, select Stop. 417 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 418 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Displaying Messages Message List 1Displaying Messages ■ Displaying text messages The 1. Go to the phone menu screen. If you delete a message on the phone, the message is also deleted in the system. If you send a message from the system, the message goes to your phone’s outbox. 2 Phone Menu screen P. 398 2. Select Text Messages. 3. Select a message. u The text message is displayed. The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. Text Message Features 418 icon appears next to an unread message. To see the previous or next message, select (previous) or (next) on the message screen. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 419 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Read or Stop reading a message 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. 2 Displaying Messages P. 418 2. Select Stop to stop reading. Select Read again to start reading the message from the beginning. 2 Displaying Messages P. 418 2. Select Reply. 3. Select the reply message. u The pop-up menu appears on the screen. 4. Select Send to send the message. u Complete appears on the screen when the reply message was successfully sent. Continued 1Reply to a message The available fixed reply messages are as follows: • Talk to you later, I’m driving. • I’m on my way. • I’m running late. • OK • Yes • No Features ■ Reply to a message 1. Go to the text message screen. u The system automatically starts reading the message aloud. You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages. Only certain phones receive and send messages when paired and connected. For a list of compatible phones: • U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/, or call 1-888-528-7876. • Canada: For more information on smartphone compatibility, call 1-888-528-7876. 419 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 420 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ Making a call to a sender 1. Go to the text message screen. 2. Select Dial. Features 420 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 421 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ In Case of Emergency 1In Case of Emergency ■ Automatic collision notification If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink® operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected. Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation. You cannot use this emergency service when: • You travel outside the HondaLink® service coverage areas. • There is a problem with the connecting devices, such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself. You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle. Features IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR. Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage. 1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds. *1 : Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not be sent to the operator. Continued 421 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 422 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus ■ To enable notification 1To enable notification 1. Go to the phone settings screen. 2 Phone settings screen P. 396 2. Select HondaLink Assist. u A pop-up menu appears on the screen. 3. Select On or Off. Features 422 Setting options: • On: Notification is available. • Off: Disable the feature. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 423 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Driving This chapter discusses driving and refueling. Before Driving Driving Preparation .......................... 424 Maximum Load Limit........................ 427 Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle ........................ 429 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ..... 430 When Driving Starting the Engine .................. 432, 435 Precautions While Driving................. 438 Continuously Variable Transmission ..... 439 Shifting .................................... 440, 442 ECON Button ................................... 446 Cruise Control * ................................ 447 * Not available on all models Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System .............. 450 LaneWatchTM * .................................. 452 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM * ...................................... 454 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 455 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 458 Honda Sensing® * .............................. 460 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ....................................... 463 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......... 473 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)...... 486 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System....495 Front Sensor Camera ....................... 500 Radar Sensor ................................... 502 Braking Brake System ................................... 503 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 508 Brake Assist System ......................... 509 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped ................................ 510 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 511 Refueling Fuel Information .............................. 513 How to Refuel ................................. 514 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 515 423 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 424 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Before Driving Driving Preparation Check the following items before you start driving. ■ Exterior Checks • Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components. • Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked. • Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressure, and check for damage and excessive wear. Driving 424 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 555 • Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside. 1Exterior Checks NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing. Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole. Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 425 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation ■ Interior Checks 1Interior Checks • Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 427 2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 148 • Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the head restraint, too. Driving • Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking. • Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving. • If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur. • Securely close and lock all doors and the tailgate. 2 Adjusting the Seats P. 190 2 Adjusting the front head restraint positions P. 197 • Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position. 2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 187 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 186 Continued 425 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 426 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation • Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver’s ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats. • Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt. 2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 44 • Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated. 2 Indicators P. 80 Driving 426 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 427 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit Maximum Load Limit The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb. 1Maximum Load Limit 3 WARNING Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed. Label Example Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual. This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer. Continued Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle. 2 Specifications P. 614 Driving Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories and all cargo. 2 Specifications P. 614 427 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 428 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb. Load Limits Example Driving Example1 Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg) Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg) Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg) Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg) Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg) Example2 428 1Maximum Load Limit Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer. 2 Towing a Trailer P. 429 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 429 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Towing a Trailer Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties. Towing Your Vehicle Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motorhome. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information. 2 Emergency Towing P. 609 Driving 429 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 430 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines General Information Your vehicle has been designed primarily for use on pavement, however, its higher ground clearance allows you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads. It is not designed for trail-blazing, or other challenging off-highway activities. If you decide to drive on unpaved roads, you will find that it requires somewhat different driving skills and that your vehicle will handle somewhat differently than it does on pavement. Pay attention to the precautions and tips in this section, and get acquainted with your vehicle before leaving the pavement. Important Safety Precautions To avoid loss of control or rollover, be sure to follow all precautions and recommendations: • Be sure to store cargo properly and do not exceed your cargo load limits. 2 Maximum Load Limit P. 427 Driving 430 • Whenever you drive, make sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts. • Keep your speed low, and never go faster than the conditions allow. • It’s up to you to continually assess the situation and drive within the limits. 1Off-Highway Driving Guidelines 3 WARNING Improperly operating this vehicle on or offpavement can cause a crash or rollover in which you and your passengers could be seriously injured or killed. • Follow all instructions and guidelines in this owner’s manual. • Keep your speed low, and don’t drive faster than conditions permit. Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 2 Important Handling Information P. 36 2 Precautions While Driving P. 438 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 431 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOff-Highway Driving GuidelinesuAvoiding Trouble Avoiding Trouble Driving • Check Out Your Vehicle before you leave the pavement and make sure that all scheduled maintenance has been completed. Pay special attention to the condition of the tires, and check the tire pressures. • Remember the route you choose presents limits (too steep or bumpy), you have limits (driving skill and comfort), and your vehicle has limits (traction, stability, and power). Failing to recognize these limits will likely put you and your passengers in a hazardous situation. • Accelerating and Braking should be done slowly and gradually. Trying to start or stop too fast can cause a loss of traction and you could lose control. • Avoiding Obstacles and Debris in the road reduces the likelihood of a rollover or damage to your suspension or other components. • Driving on Slopes increases your risk of a rollover, particularly if you attempt to drive across a slope that is too steep. Going straight up or down a slope is usually the safest. If you can’t clearly see all conditions or obstacles on a slope, walk it before you drive it. If there is any doubt whether you can safely pass, don’t try it. Find another route. If you get stuck when climbing, do not try to turn around. Back down slowly following the same route you took up the hill. • Crossing a Stream - Avoid driving through deep water. If you encounter water in your route (a small stream or large puddle, for example), evaluate it carefully before going ahead. Make sure it is shallow, flowing slowly, and has firm ground underneath. If you are not sure of the depth or the ground, turn around and find another route. Driving through deep water can also damage your vehicle. The water can get into the transmission and differential, diluting the lubricant and causing an eventual failure. It can also wash the grease out of the wheel bearings. • If You Get Stuck, carefully go in the direction that you think will get you unstuck. Do not spin the tires as this will only make things worse and could damage the transmission. If you are unable to free yourself, your vehicle will need to be towed. 431 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 432 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 When Driving Models without smart entry system Starting the Engine 1Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The electric parking brake indicator comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up to electric parking brake switch. Electric Parking Brake Switch Brake Pedal Driving 432 2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N , it is safer to start it in (P . Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine. The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters). When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, heating and cooling system */climate control system *, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain. If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details. If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system. * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 433 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine 3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e without depressing the accelerator pedal. 1Starting the Engine Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10 seconds. • If the engine does not start right away, wait for at least 30 seconds before trying again. • If the engine starts, but then immediately stops, wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3 while gently depressing the accelerator pedal. Release the accelerator pedal once the engine starts. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled. 2 Immobilizer System P. 159 1Starting to Drive 1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing. 2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. u Make sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off. 2 Parking Brake P. 503 Continued You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal. Driving ■ Starting to Drive 433 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 434 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. Put the transmission into (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal. 1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines. Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off. Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake. Driving 434 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 435 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine Models with smart entry system Starting the Engine 1Starting the Engine 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The electric parking brake indicator comes on for 15 seconds when you pull up to electric parking brake switch. Electric Parking Brake Switch Brake Pedal 2. Check that the transmission is in (P , then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N , it is safer to start it in (P . Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine. The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters). When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain. If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details. Driving If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system. The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft.If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled. 2 Immobilizer System P. 159 Continued 435 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 436 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal. 1Starting the Engine Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry remote is weak. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 592 The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is subjected to strong radio waves. ■ Stopping the Engine You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Put the transmission into (P . 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button. Driving 436 Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine. If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before trying again. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 437 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine ■ Starting to Drive 1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into (D . Select (R when reversing. 2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. u Make sure the electric parking brake indicator goes off. 2 Parking Brake P. 503 ■ Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator. Put the transmission into (D or (S when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal. 1Starting to Drive You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal. 1Hill start assist system Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines. Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake. Driving Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off. 437 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 438 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving Precautions While Driving ■ Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control: • Take corners at slower speeds than you would with a passenger vehicle. • Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers whenever possible. • Do not modify your vehicle in any way that you would raise the center of gravity. • Do not carry heavy cargo on the roof. Never carry more than 165 lbs (75 kg) of cargo on the roof rack (Honda accessory). ■ In Rain Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure. 1Precautions While Driving NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission. NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system. Driving If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1 while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle. Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance. During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as to not damage the engine or powertrain. Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km). You should also follow this when the brake pads are replaced. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 438 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 439 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission ■ Other Precautions If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks. 1Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in a crash or a rollover. 2 Important Handling Information P. 36 2 Precautions While Driving P. 438 Continuously Variable Transmission ■ Creeping The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped. ■ Kickdown Driving Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves. 439 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 440 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting Continuously variable transmission models without paddle shifters Shifting 1Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. ■ Shift lever positions Park Used when parking or starting the engine Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Transmission is not locked Driving Drive Used for normal driving Release Button Drive (S) Used: ● For better acceleration ● To increase engine braking ● When going up or down hills Low Used to further increase engine braking ● Used when going up or down hills ● 440 You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P . The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake. When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 441 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Shift Lever Operation 1Shift Lever Operation NOTICE Models with information display Models with multi-information display Tachometer’s red zone When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission. Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away. If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button. The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt. Driving Shift Lever Position Indicator (Transmission indicator) It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first. Press the shift lever release button and shift. 441 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 442 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting Continuously variable transmission models with paddle shifters Shifting 1Shifting Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs. ■ Shift lever positions Park Used when parking or starting the engine Reverse Used when reversing Neutral Transmission is not locked Driving Drive Used: ● For normal driving ● When temporarily driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode Release Button 442 Drive (S) Used for: ● For better acceleration ● To increase engine braking ● When going up or down hills ● When driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) unless the shift lever is in (P . The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake. When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 443 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ Shift Lever Operation 1Shift Lever Operation NOTICE Models with information display Models with multi-information display Shift Lever Position Indicator (Transmission indicator) Tachometer’s red zone When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission. Use the shift lever position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away. If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible. Shift Lever Position Indicator (Transmission indicator) M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Driving The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt. It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button and shift. Continued 443 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 444 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without removing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed. ■ When the shift lever is in (D : The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn. Driving ■ When the shift lever is in (S : The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st. If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up. You can only pull away in 1st speed. When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, move the shift lever from (S to (D . When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator go off. 444 17-Speed Manual Shift Mode In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position. When the engine speed reaches near the tachometer’s red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically. Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal (D driving mode. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 445 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguShifting ■ 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation (- Paddle Shifter (Shift down) 17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation (+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up) Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed. The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking. Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to higher speed number) Driving Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to lower speed number) 445 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 446 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguECON Button ECON Button Models with information display Models with multi-information display Driving 446 * Not available on all models The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission, heating and cooling system */climate control system *, and cruise control *. 1ECON Button Models with climate control system While in ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuations. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 447 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control * Cruise Control * Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration. Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~ Always keep sufficient distance between you and the vehicle in front of you. Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather. ■ Shift positions for cruise control: It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed when driving uphill or downhill. In (D or (S How to use CRUISE MAIN is on in the instrument panel. ■ Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. Continued When not using cruise control: Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE button. While in ECON mode, it may take relatively more time to accelerate to maintain the set speed. Driving Cruise control is ready to use. * Not available on all models 3 WARNING Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash. When to use ■ Vehicle speed for cruise control: 1Cruise Control * 447 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 448 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control * ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed –/SET Button On On Press and release On when cruise control begins Driving Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. 448 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 449 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control * ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the steering wheel. You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with the accelerator and brake pedals. To increase speed To decrease speed ■ To Cancel CRUISE Button To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the CRUISE button. • Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off. CANCEL Button 1To Cancel Driving • Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). • If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you release it. This speed is then set. Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. You cannot set or resume in the following situations: • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) • When the CRUISE button is turned off At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control is canceled automatically. 449 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 450 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System VSA® helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes. ■ VSA® Operation VSA® System Indicator Driving 450 When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic system. You will also see the indicator blink. 1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety. The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 451 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System ■ VSA® On and Off VSA® OFF Indicator This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep. 1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off. To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep. Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off. VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal. Driving Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective. When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on. 451 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 452 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM * LaneWatchTM * LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience while driving. The system activates when you: Move the turn signal lever to the passenger side. The passenger side view display appears on the audio/information screen. Press the LaneWatch button. Driving Press the LaneWatch button again. 452 * Not available on all models Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change lanes before doing so may result in a crash and serious injury or death. Do not rely only on LaneWatch while driving. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather, lighting (including headlights and low sun angle), ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading. Camera Audio/Information Screen 3 WARNING Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in a collision. The system deactivates when you: Pull the turn signal lever back. 1LaneWatchTM * The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display of traffic to the side and rear under the following conditions: • Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered, changing the height of the vehicle. • Your tires are over or under inflated. • Your tires or wheels are of varied size or construction. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 453 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM * ■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen. • Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when you operate the turn signal lever. • Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the remaining LaneWatch display time after you pull the turn signal lever back. • Reference Line: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch monitor. • Next Maneuver Pop up *: Selects whether a turn direction screen of the navigation system interrupts the LaneWatch display. • Display: Adjusts display settings. 2 Customized Features P. 345 The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique lens makes objects on the screen slightly look different from what they are. LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift lever is in (R . For proper LaneWatch operation: • The camera is located in the passenger side door mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris. • Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers of any kind. • Do not touch the camera lens. 1Reference Lines Three lines that appear on the screen can give an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on the screen are from your vehicle, respectively. If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates that it is close to your vehicle whereas an object near line 3 is farther away. The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm the safety of a lane change before changing lanes. Driving ■ Reference Lines 1LaneWatchTM * The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and 3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines on the screen may seem to appear closer than the actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more heavily loaded. Consult a dealer if: • The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is severely impacted, resulting in changing the camera angle. • The LaneWatch display does not come on at all. * Not available on all models 453 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 454 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguReal Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM * Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM * Your vehicle is equipped with the AWD system. When the system senses a loss of front wheel traction, it automatically transfers some power to the rear wheels. This allows you to utilize all available traction and may increase mobility. You still need to exercise the same care when accelerating, steering, and braking that you would in a two wheel drive vehicle. If you excessively spin all four wheels and overheat the AWD system, only the front wheels receive power. Stop until the system cools down. Driving 454 * Not available on all models 1Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM * NOTICE Do not continuously spin the front tires of your vehicle. Continuously spinning the front tires can cause transmission or rear differential damage. The AWD system may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified. 2 Tire and Wheel Replacement P. 562 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 455 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) U.S. models only Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator indicator to come on and a message to appear * on the multi-information display *. Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on. You must start TPMS calibration every time you: • Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. • Rotate the tires. • Replace one or more tires. Driving Tire pressure checked and inflated in: • Warm weather can become under-inflated in colder weather. • Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation. The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 555 ■ TPMS Calibration The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when: • You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the steering wheel. • You drive on snowy or slippery roads. • Snow chains are used. Before calibrating the TPMS: • Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires. 2 Checking Tires P. 555 Make sure: • The vehicle is at a complete stop. • The shift lever is in (P . • The ignition switch is in ON (w *1. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. * Not available on all models The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed. Continued The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on under the following conditions: • A compact spare tire is used. • There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than the condition at calibration. • Snow chains are used. 455 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 456 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Models with information display Press and hold the TPMS button until the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice, indicating the calibration process has begun. • If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does not blink, confirm the above conditions then press and hold the TPMS button again. • The calibration process finishes automatically. 1TPMS Calibration • TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed. • The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 30-60 mph (48-97 km/h). • During this period, if the ignition is turned on*1 and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete. TPMS Button If the snow chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS. Driving If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 456 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 457 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Models with multi-information display Driving You can calibrate the system from the customized features on the multi-information display. 1. Press the button to select Vehicle Settings, then press the SEL/RESET button. u TPMS Calibration appears on the display. 2. Press the SEL/RESET button. u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate. 3. Press the button and select Calibrate, then press the SEL/RESET button. u Calibration Started screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen. • If the Calibration Failed To Start message appears, repeat steps 2-3. • The calibration process finishes automatically. 457 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 458 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation U.S. models Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale Driving when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. 458 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 459 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. 459 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 460 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Honda Sensing® * Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: a radar sensor located in the front grille and a front sensor camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror. Honda Sensing® has following functions. ■ The functions which do not require switch operations to activate • Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 463 • Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System 2 P. 495 ■ The functions which require switch operations to activate • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 2 P. 473 • Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 486 Driving 460 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 461 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * u ■ Operation Switches for the ACC and LKAS MAIN button CANCEL Button Interval Button LKAS Button −/SET Button ■ LKAS Button Press to activate or cancel the LKAS. ■ RES/+ and −/SET Button Press RES/+ to resume the ACC or increase the vehicle speed. Press −/SET to set the ACC or decrease the vehicle speed. ■ Interval Button Press the (interval) button to change the ACC following-interval. Driving RES/+ Button ■ MAIN Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC and LKAS. Or press to cancel these systems. ■ CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC. Continued 461 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 462 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * u ■ Multi-Information Display Content You can see the current state of ACC and LKAS. a Indicates that ACC and LKAS are ready to be activated. b Indicates that LKAS is activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected. c Indicates whether or not a vehicle is detected ahead. Driving 462 d Shows the set vehicle speed. e Shows the set vehicle interval. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 463 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable. ■ How the system works When to use The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. 1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent a collision nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions. The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions: 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 467 For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page. 2 Radar Sensor P. 502 The radar sensor is in the front grille. Driving You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 1How the system works The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you. The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. ● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you. ● Continued Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph (30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle detected in front of you. When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle stops or a potential collision is not determined. 463 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 464 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ When the system activates 1When the system activates The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. ● Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change lanes, etc.) Visual Alerts The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list. 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 467 Beep Driving Audible Alert Tactile Alert At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/ Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through audio/ information screen setting options. 2 List of customizable options P. 358 ■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and audible alerts. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the steering wheel, etc.). 464 1Vibration alert on the steering wheel Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on. 2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator P. 90 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 465 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Collision Alert Stages The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage. CMBSTM Distance between vehicles Stage one Normal Long Short Vehicle Ahead The sensors detect a vehicle There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you. Your Vehicle Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead When in Long, visual and audible alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter distance than in Normal. The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced. Steering Wheel In case of an oncoming vehicle detected, rapid vibration is provided. Braking — — Lightly applied — Forcefully applied Driving Stage two Audible & Visual WARNINGS Visual and audible alerts. Stage three Your Vehicle Vehicle Ahead The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable. Continued 465 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 466 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ CMBSTM On and Off 1CMBSTM On and Off Press and hold the button until the beeper sounds to switch the system on or off. When the CMBSTM is off: • The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument panel comes on. • A message on the multi-information display reminds you that the system is off. The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle. Driving 466 The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain conditions: 2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 467 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 467 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations 1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently). 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 ■ Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between objects and the background. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel. Driving • • • • • • • • • ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads. Continued 467 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 468 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Vehicle conditions • • • • • • • • • Driving 468 Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. The inside of the windshield is fogged. An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). When tire chains are installed. The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. The camera temperature gets too high. Driving with the parking brake applied. When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 469 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Driving ■ Detection limitations • A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you. • The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is too short. • A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. • When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you at high speed. • The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small vehicle. • When there are animals in front of your vehicle. • When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. • The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of you is significantly large. • An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. • Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc. • Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. • When driving through a narrow iron bridge. • When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down. Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only • When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by side. • Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian. • When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about 6.6 feet (2 meters) in height. • When a pedestrian blends in with the background. • When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or they are running. • When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group. • When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size). Continued 469 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 470 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ Automatic shutoff CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the CMBSTM indicator comes and stays on when: • The temperature inside the system is high. • You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an extended period. • An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.). • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. Once the conditions that caused CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on. Driving 470 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 471 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ With Little Chance of a Collision The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are: ■ When passing Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass. ■ At an intersection Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn. Driving Continued 471 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 472 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ■ On a curve When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming vehicle is right in front of you. ■ Through a low bridge at high speed You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed. Driving 472 ■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc. You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train tracks or roadside objects [such as a traffic sign and guard rail] on a curve or, when parking, stationary vehicles and walls. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 473 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 3 WARNING Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash. When to use The camera is located behind the rearview mirror. Use ACC only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good weather conditions. 3 WARNING ACC has limited braking capability. When your vehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35 km/h), ACC will automatically cancel and no longer will apply your vehicle’s brakes. Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal when conditions require. Driving The radar sensor is in the front grille. ■ Vehicle speed for adaptive cruise control: Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~ ■ Shift positions for adaptive cruise control: In (D or (S Continued 473 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 474 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ How to activate the system 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) How to use ACC is on in the multiinformation display. Adaptive cruise control is ready to use. Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 For directions on the proper handling of the radar sensor, refer to the following page. 2 Radar Sensor P. 502 Driving 474 ■ Press the MAIN button on the steering wheel. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 475 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 478 –/SET Button When not using ACC: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS). When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are either turned on or off. On when adaptive cruise control begins Press and release Continued Driving Take your foot off the pedal and press down the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC begins. Set Vehicle Set Vehicle When ACC starts operating, the vehicle icon, Speed Interval interval bars and set speed appear on the multi-information display. Do not use ACC under the following conditions: • On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in continuous stop and go traffic. • On roads with sharp turns. • On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such cases, ACC will not apply the brakes to maintain the set speed. • On roads with toll collection facilities or other objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access. 475 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 476 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ When in Operation 1When in Operation ■ There is a vehicle ahead ACC monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC system maintains or decelerates your vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following-interval from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper sounds, a message appears on the multi-information display. 2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 481 ACC Range: 394 ft. (120 m) Driving When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down. A vehicle icon appears on the multi-information display. 476 Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead. Beep 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 477 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ There is no vehicle ahead 1When in Operation Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it. A vehicle icon with dotted-line contour appears on the multiinformation display. Continued You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC detecting range. Change the ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep setting. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC. Additionally, ACC may not work properly under certain conditions. 2 ACC Conditions and Limitations P. 478 Driving ■ When you depress the accelerator pedal You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC range. ACC stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following-interval while a vehicle ahead is within the ACC range. Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances: • The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle. • A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles. 477 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 478 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ ACC Conditions and Limitations The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 ■ Environmental conditions Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). ■ Roadway conditions Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). ■ Vehicle conditions Driving 478 • The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The camera temperature gets too high. • The parking brake is applied. • When the front grille is dirty. • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • When tire chains are installed. 1ACC Conditions and Limitations If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by pressing the MAIN button and take your vehicle to a dealer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 479 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ Detection limitations • • • • A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly. When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle ahead of you at high speed. • The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle. • When there are animals in front of your vehicle. • When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you. Driving • The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle in front of you is significantly large. • An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you. • Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle. Continued 479 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 480 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • When driving through a narrow iron bridge. • When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly. • When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape. Radar detects upper section of an empty carrier truck. Panel truck, tanker truck, etc. Driving • When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane. 480 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 481 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed 1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the steering wheel. If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. To increase speed You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the multi-information display between mph and km/h. 2 Customized Features P. 123 To decrease speed Driving • Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly. • If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly. ■ To Set or Change Following-interval Interval Button Press the (interval) button to change the ACC following-interval. Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through short, middle, long, and extra long followingintervals. Continued 481 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 482 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Determine the most appropriate following-interval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation. The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or extra long following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference. When the Set Speed is: Vehicle Interval Driving 482 50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h) Short 86.7 feet 26.4 meters 1.2 sec 100.5 feet 30.6 meters 1.1 sec Middle 112.9 feet 34.4 meters 1.5 sec 137.4 feet 41.9 meters 1.5 sec Long 157.2 feet 47.9 meters 2.2 sec 200.0 feet 61.0 meters 2.1 sec Extra Long 220.2 feet 67.1 meters 3.0 sec 282.7 feet 86.2 meters 3.0 sec 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 483 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Cancel 1To Cancel MAIN Button To cancel ACC, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the MAIN button. u ACC indicator (green) goes off. • Depress the brake pedal. CANCEL Button Continued The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC has been turned off using the MAIN button. Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then set the desired speed. 1Automatic cancellation Even though ACC has been automatically canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed. Wait until the condition that caused ACC to cancel improves, then press the RES/+ button. Driving ■ Automatic cancellation The beeper sounds and a message appears on the multi-information display when ACC is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC to automatically cancel: • Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). • When the radar sensor in the front grille gets dirty. • The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. • An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. • Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. • Abrupt steering wheel movement. • When the ABS or VSA® or CMBSTM is activated. • When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on. • When you manually apply the parking brake. • When the detected vehicle within the ACC range is too close to your vehicle. • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC, you can resume the prior set speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+ button when driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. 483 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 484 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Switch ACC to Cruise Control ACC ON Cruise Control ON Press and hold the (interval) button for one second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on the multi-information display for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. To switch back to ACC, press and hold the (interval) button again for one second. ACC Mode Selected appears on the multiinformation display for two seconds. ■ When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~. Driving 484 1To Switch ACC to Cruise Control Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle ahead of you. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 485 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ■ To Set the Vehicle Speed 1To Cancel Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on. Resuming the prior set speed: After cruise control has been canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+ button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. ■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed You cannot set or resume in the following situations: • When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) • When the MAIN button is turned off. Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph (1 km/h). If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly. At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically. ■ To Cancel Driving To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: • Press the CANCEL button. • Press the MAIN button. • Depress the brake pedal. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off. 485 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 486 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane. ■ Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines. ■ Front sensor camera Monitors the lane lines ■ Tactile and visual alerts Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane. 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a substitute for your vehicle control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle. 2 Multi-Information Display Warning and Information Messages * P. 100 Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the front windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes. Driving The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions. The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways. The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions: 2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 492 When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off. If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering. 486 * Not available on all models You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected, system will recover automatically. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 487 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ Lane Keep Support Function 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger. When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display. Driving ■ Lane Departure Warning Function The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves. Warning Area Warning Area Continued 487 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 488 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ When the System can be Used The system can be used when the following conditions are met. • The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and your vehicle is in the center of the lane. • The vehicle speed is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). • You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. • The turn signals are off. • The brake pedal is not depressed. • The wipers are not in high speed operation. ■ How to activate the system MAIN Button Driving LKAS Button 488 1. Press the MAIN button. u The LKAS indicator comes on in the multi-information display. The system is ready to use. 2. Press the LKAS button. u Lane outlines appear on the multiinformation display. The system is activated. 1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 489 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The dotted outer lines change to solid ones once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings. 1To Cancel Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC on and off. ■ To Cancel MAIN Button The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle. Continued Driving LKAS Button To cancel the LKAS: Press the MAIN or LKAS button. 489 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 490 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ The system operation is suspended if When the LKAS is suspended, the lane lines on the multiinformation display change to contour lines, and the beeper sounds (if activated). Driving 490 you: • Set the wipers to HI. u Turning the wipers off or setting it to LO resumes the LKAS. • Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS. • Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal. Models with automatic intermittent wipers • Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the wipers operate at high speed. u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop or operate at low speed. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 491 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when: • • • • • The system fails to detect lane lines. The steering wheel is quickly turned. You fail to steer the vehicle. Driving through a sharp curve. Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes. ■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when: • The camera temperature gets extremely high. • The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including the windshield, gets dirty. • The ABS or VSA® system engages. Driving The beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled. Continued 491 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 492 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following: ■ Environmental conditions Driving 492 • • • • • • • • • • Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 493 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. • Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings. Faded lines Duplicate lines Tire tracks Driving • The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk). • The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. Very wide or narrow traffic lane Continued 493 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 494 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) • • • • The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines). • Driving on roads with double lines. Lane void of lines at junction Driving 494 ■ Vehicle conditions • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. • The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • The inside of the windshield is fogged. • The camera temperature gets too high. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 495 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings and/or leaving the roadway altogether. ■ How the System Works The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings (in white or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close to detected lane markings without a turn signal activated, the system, in addition to a visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts you with rapid vibrations on the steering wheel, to help you remain within the detected lane. 2 Customized Features P. 123 If the system determines that its steering input is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the roadway, it may apply braking. u Braking is applied only when the lane markings are solid continuous lines. The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings. Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has limitations. Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane. The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM system may not detect all lane markings or lane or roadway departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions. You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system. 2 Front Sensor Camera P. 500 Driving As a visual alert, the Lane Departure message appears on the multi-information display. 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System The RDM system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions: 2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 498 There are times when you may not notice RDM functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions. If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you. Continued 495 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 496 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ How the System Activates The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the following conditions are met: • The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). • The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. • The turn signals are off. • The brake pedal is not depressed. • The wipers are not in continuous operation. • The vehicle is not accelerating or braking, and the steering wheel is not being turned. • The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating, braking or steering. 1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the multi-information display, the message below will appear in case the system determines a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Driving 1How the System Activates The RDM system may automatically shut off and the indicator comes and stays on. 2 Indicators P. 80 RDM system function can be impacted when the vehicle is: • Not driven within a traffic lane. • Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of a lane. • Driven in a narrow lane. 496 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 497 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ RDM On and Off RDM Button 1RDM On and Off Press the RDM button to turn the system on and off. u The indicator in the button comes on and the message appears on the multiinformation display when the system is on. When you have selected Warning Only from the customized options using the multi-information display, the system does not operate the steering wheel and braking. 2 Customized Features P. 123 Indicator Driving Continued 497 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 498 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ RDM Conditions and Limitations The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. ■ Environmental conditions Driving 498 • • • • • • • • • • Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel. There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings. Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers. Reflections on the interior of the windshield. Driving at night or in a dark condition such as a tunnel. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 499 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System ■ Roadway conditions • Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks, reflected lights, road spray, high contrast). • Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. • Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road repairs or old lane markings. • The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection or crosswalk). • The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. • The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines. • The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. • Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. • When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white lines (or yellow lines). • Driving on roads with double lines. Driving ■ Vehicle conditions • Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted. • The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc. • The inside of the windshield is fogged. • The camera temperature gets too high. • An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction, improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). • The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications. • When tire chains are installed. 499 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 500 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uFront Sensor Camera Front Sensor Camera The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC, and CMBSTM, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its functions. ■ Camera Location and Handling Tips Front Sensor Camera Driving 500 This camera is located behind the rearview mirror. To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it. 1Front Sensor Camera Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera’s field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly. Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 501 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uFront Sensor Camera 1Front Sensor Camera If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message appears: • Use the climate control system to cool down the interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera. • Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield temperature, which cools down the area around the camera. Driving If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot Operate: Clean Front Windshield message appears: • Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the windshield. If the message does not disappear after you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 501 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 502 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuHonda Sensing® * uRadar Sensor Radar Sensor The radar sensor is in the front grille. 1Radar Sensor Avoid strong impacts to the radar sensor cover. Radar Sensor The radar sensor is in the front grille. For the CMBSTM to work properly: • Always keep the radar sensor cover clean. • Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a mild detergent. • Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or replace the radar sensor cover. If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly impacted, turn off the system by using the CMBS OFF button and take your vehicle to a dealer. 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 466 Driving 502 If the vehicle is involved in any of the following situations, the radar sensor may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer: • Your vehicle is involved in a frontal collision. • Your vehicle drives through deep water or is submerged in deep water. • Your vehicle strongly strikes a bump, curb, chock, or embankment that could jar the radar sensor. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 503 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Braking Brake System ■ Parking Brake 1Parking Brake Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it. ■ To apply The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the ignition switch*1 is in. Electric Parking Brake Switch Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal. You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the battery goes dead. 2 Jump Starting P. 594 If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released. Driving Electric Parking Brake Switch Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely. u The electric parking brake indicator comes on. ■ To release The ignition switch must be ON (w *1 in order to release the electric parking brake. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the electric parking brake switch. u The electric parking brake indicator goes off. You may hear the electric parking brake system operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal. In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates. • When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake hold system activated for more than 10 minutes. • When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system is applied. • When the engine is turned off while the brake hold system is applied. • When there is a problem with the brake hold system. 503 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 504 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBrakinguBrake System ■ To release automatically Use the accelerator pedal to release the brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam. Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. When on a hill, it may require more accelerator input to release. u The electric parking brake indicator goes off. Accelerator Pedal Driving 504 1Parking Brake If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually. When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake. The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on: • Malfunction indicator lamp • Transmission indicator The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on: • Electric parking brake system indicator • VSA® system indicator • ABS indicator • Supplemental restraint system indicator The parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving with the electric parking brake switch being pulled. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 505 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBrakinguBrake System You can release the parking brake automatically when: • You are wearing the driver’s seat belt. • The engine is running. • The transmission is not in (P or (N . 1Foot Brake Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times. ■ Foot Brake Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard. 2 Brake Assist System P. 509 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 508 If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc. Driving Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a lower speed position. Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you. Continued 505 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 506 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBrakinguBrake System ■ Automatic Brake Hold 1Automatic Brake Hold Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic. ■ Turning on the system ■ Activating the system Comes On On On Comes On Goes Off U.S. Automatic Brake Hold Button Driving 506 Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button. ● The automatic brake hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on. Brake Pedal ■ Canceling the system Comes On Accelerator Pedal Canada Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The shift lever must be in other than (P or (R . ● The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes. ● Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Depress the accelerator pedal while the shift lever is in other than (P or (N . The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move. ● The automatic brake hold indicator goes off. The system releases the brake automatically. 3 WARNING Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal. If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads. 3 WARNING Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving. If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death. Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 507 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBrakinguBrake System ■ The system automatically cancels when: • You engage the parking brake. • You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R . ■ The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when: • • • • Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes. The driver’s seat belt is unfastened. The engine is turned off. There is a problem with automatic brake hold system. ■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system Automatic Brake Hold Button If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed. While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do. 2 When Stopped P. 510 Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is off. 1Turning on the system Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash. You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation. The system generates sound while holding the vehicle and it moves. Driving Goes Off While the system is on, press the automatic brake hold button again. u The automatic brake hold system indicator goes off. 1Automatic Brake Hold 507 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 508 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS) Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ■ ABS Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you. The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading. You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as “stomp and steer.” ■ ABS operation Driving The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice. ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: • Wet or snow covered roads. • Roads paved with stone. • Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc. When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops. 508 1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the wrong size or type. If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately. The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control. In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS: • You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces, such as gravel or snow. • The tires are equipped with snow chains. The following may be observed with the ABS system: • Motor sounds coming from the engine compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates. • Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 509 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBrakinguBrake Assist System Brake Assist System Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking. ■ Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking. When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down. Driving 509 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 510 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Parking Your Vehicle When Stopped 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly, but fully. 3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P . 4. Turn off the engine. u The electric parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds. Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an incline. 1Parking Your Vehicle Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire. 1When Stopped 3 WARNING The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged. A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death. Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator. Driving NOTICE The following can damage the transmission: • Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. • Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by depressing the accelerator pedal. • Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle stops completely. In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash. 510 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 511 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Multi-View Rear Camera About Your Multi-View Rear Camera The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view. The display automatically changes to a rear view when the transmission is put into (R . ■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are. Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle. Wide View Mode Guidelines Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 20 inches (50 cm) Camera 1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera Normal View Mode If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris. Top Down View Mode Bumper Continued Driving Models with display audio system You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings. 2 Customized Features P. 352 Fixed Guideline On: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R . Off: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. Off: Guidelines do not move. 511 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 512 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera You can view three different camera modes on the rearview display. Models with color audio system Press the LIST/SELECT (selector) knob to switch the mode. Models with display audio system Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode. : Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode All models Driving • If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the next time you put the transmission into (R . • If Top down view was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide View mode is selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 and put the transmission into (R . • If Top down view was last used more than 10 seconds after you put the transmission from (R , Wide View mode is selected the next time you put the transmission into (R . *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 512 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 513 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Refueling Fuel Information ■ Fuel recommendation Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher Use of lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage. ■ Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available. Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline. Driving Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission control system. 1Fuel Information ■ Fuel tank capacity: 13.2 US gal (50 L) 513 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 514 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel How to Refuel 1. Stop your vehicle with the service station pump on the left side of the vehicle in the rear. 2. Turn off the engine. 3. Pull on the fuel fill door release handle under the driver’s side lower outside corner of the dashboard. u The fuel fill door opens. Fuel Fill Door Release Handle Pull 4. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. If you hear a release of air, wait until this stops, then turn the knob slowly to open the fuel fill cap. 1How to Refuel 3 WARNING Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel. • Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. • Handle fuel only outdoors. • Wipe up spills immediately. The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature. Driving Cap Cap Holder 514 5. Place the fuel fill cap in the holder. 6. Insert the fuel filler nozzle fully. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. This leaves space in the fuel tank in case the fuel expands with a change in the temperature. 7. After filling, replace the fuel fill cap, tightening it until you hear it click at least once. u Shut the fuel fill door by hand. Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity. If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 515 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle. 1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving. Miles driven Gallons of fuel Miles per Gallon 100 Liter Kilometers L per 100 km ■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the information display. • Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended. In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/ 2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 531 Driving • Maintain the specified tire pressure. • Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. • Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle’s underside adds weight and increases wind resistance. 515 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 516 516 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 517 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Maintenance This chapter discusses basic maintenance. Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 518 Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 519 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 520 Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 521 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 529 Opening the Hood ........................... 530 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 531 Oil Check ......................................... 532 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 533 * Not available on all models Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 534 Engine Coolant ................................ 536 Transmission Fluid............................ 538 Brake Fluid....................................... 539 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 540 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 541 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades.... 551 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 555 Tire and Loading Information Label .. 557 Tire Labeling .................................... 557 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles).. 559 Wear Indicators................................ 561 Tire Service Life................................ 561 Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 562 Tire Rotation.................................... 563 Winter Tires ..................................... 564 Battery............................................... 566 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery ........... 568 Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance....... 570 Cleaning Interior Care .................................... 571 Exterior Care.................................... 573 Accessories and Modifications ........ 576 517 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 518 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.) ■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance ■ Daily inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling. ■ Periodic inspections • Check the brake fluid level monthly. 2 Brake Fluid P. 539 • Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. 2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 555 • Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly. Maintenance 518 2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 541 • Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months. 1Inspection and Maintenance U.S. models Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are “certified” to EPA standards. According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the information display */multiinformation display *. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 523, 527 If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com. 2 Authorized Manuals P. 623 2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 551 If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet. * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 519 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance Safety When Performing Maintenance Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task. ■ Maintenance Safety • To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts. • Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire. • To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline. • Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air. • Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation. • The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off. • Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts. • Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. 3 WARNING Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner’s manual. 3 WARNING Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed. Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner’s manual. Maintenance ■ Vehicle Safety 1Safety When Performing Maintenance 519 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 520 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles. Maintenance 520 1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service NOTICE Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 521 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Maintenance MinderTM If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the information display or the multi-information display every time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services. Models with information display To Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Displaying the Engine Oil Life 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Press the (select/reset) knob repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the information display. Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage. Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0 Maintenance The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays on in the instrument panel after the engine oil life becomes 0%. Have the indicated maintenance done by a dealer immediately. 1Displaying the Engine Oil Life *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 521 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 522 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display To switch the display, press the Oil Life Display (select/reset) knob. Explanation Information The engine oil life indicator starts to appear along with other due soon maintenance item codes when the remaining oil life becomes 15 percent. The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life. The remaining engine oil life has passed its service life, and a negative distance appears after driving over 10 miles. The negative distance on the display blinks. The engine oil life has passed. The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately. Maintenance Minder Indicator Starts to come on when the remaining engine oil life becomes 15 percent. It goes off when the display is The SERVICE message also starts The engine oil has almost reached switched. to appear along with the engine oil the end of its service life, and the life indicator and the maintenance maintenance items should be inspected and serviced as soon as item codes. possible. Maintenance 522 Stays on as a reminder even when the display is switched. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 523 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Service Items Maintenance Minder Indicator 1Maintenance Service Items • Independent of the Maintenance Minder Maintenance Minder Message Main Item information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy. Sub Items *1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty. * Not available on all models CODE Maintenance Sub Items 1 • Rotate tires 2 • Replace air cleaner element*2 • Replace dust and pollen filter*3 • Inspect drive belt 3 • Replace transmission fluid*4 4 • Replace spark plugs • Inspect valve clearance 5 • Replace engine coolant 6 • Replace rear differential fluid * Maintenance CODE Maintenance Main Items A • Replace engine oil*1 B • Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter • Inspect front and rear brakes • Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots • Inspect suspension components • Inspect driveshaft boots • Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®) • Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids • Inspect exhaust system# • Inspect fuel lines and connections# *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km). Continued 523 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 524 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Resetting the Display Reset the engine oil life display if you have performed the maintenance service. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w . 2. Display the engine oil life by repeatedly pressing the (select/reset) knob. 3. Press and hold the knob for 10 seconds or more. u The engine oil life indicator and the maintenance item codes blink. 4. Press the knob for five seconds or more. u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%. Maintenance 524 1Resetting the Display NOTICE Failure to reset the engine oil life after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems. The dealer will reset the engine oil life display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the engine oil life display yourself. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 525 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM Models with multi-information display To Use Maintenance MinderTM 1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information ■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the multi-information display. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the (Information) button repeatedly until the engine oil life appears on the multi-information display. Remaining Engine Oil Life Maintenance Item Codes Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage. Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0 There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the multi-information display. 2 Maintenance Service Items P. 527 Button Maintenance Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 525 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 526 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Multi-Information Display Maintenance Maintenance Message Oil Life Display Explanation Information Maintenance Due Soon 15 % The remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent. Once you switch the display by pressing the (Information) button, this message will go off. The engine oil is approaching the end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected and serviced soon. Maintenance Due Now 5% The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the percent. Press the button to end of its service life, and the maintenance items should be inspected switch to another display. and serviced as soon as possible. Maintenance Past Due Negative Distance The system message indicator ( 526 The remaining engine oil life has The engine oil life has passed. passed its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must be inspected and serviced immediately. distance appears after driving over 10 miles (U.S. models) or 10 km (Canadian models). Press the button to switch to another display. ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 527 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Maintenance Service Items System Message Indicator 1Maintenance Service Items • Independent of the Maintenance Minder Maintenance Minder Message they are noisy. Main Item *1: If a message SERVICE does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty. Sub Items CODE Maintenance Sub Items 1 • Rotate tires 2 • Replace air cleaner element*2 • Replace dust and pollen filter*3 • Inspect drive belt 3 • Replace transmission fluid*4 4 • Replace spark plugs • Inspect valve clearance 5 • Replace engine coolant 6 • Replace rear differential fluid * Maintenance CODE Maintenance Main Items A • Replace engine oil*1 B • Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter • Inspect front and rear brakes • Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots • Inspect suspension components • Inspect driveshaft boots • Inspect brake hoses and lines (Including ABS/VSA®) • Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids • Inspect exhaust system# • Inspect fuel lines and connections# * Not available on all models information, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. • Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if *2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures. This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km). Continued 527 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 528 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM ■ Resetting the Display 1Resetting the Display Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service. Maintenance Item Codes (Information) Button SEL/RESET Button Engine Oil Life Maintenance 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. 2. Press the button to select Maintenance Info., then press the SEL/RESET button. 3. Select Reset with the button, then press the SEL/RESET button. u The displayed maintenance items disappear, and the engine oil life display returns to 100%. To cancel the oil life reset mode, select Cancel, then press the SEL/RESET button. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 528 NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems. The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 529 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Maintenance Under the Hood Maintenance Items Under the Hood Brake Fluid (Black Cap) Engine Oil Fill Cap Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange) Battery Washer Fluid (Blue Cap) Maintenance Radiator Cap Engine Coolant Reserve Tank 529 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 530 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood Opening the Hood Hood Release Handle 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake. 2. Pull the hood release handle under the driver’s side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly. 1Opening the Hood NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage either the hood or the wipers. NOTICE 3. Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever. Lever Maintenance Grip Support Rod 530 Clamp 4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood. When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close. Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts. When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched. If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 531 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil Recommended Engine Oil Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows. Oil is a major contributor to your engine’s performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged. Genuine Engine Oil • Genuine Honda Motor Oil Commercial Engine Oil • Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container 1Recommended Engine Oil Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability. The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute’s latest requirements. 0W-20 Ambient Temperature *1:Formulated to improve fuel economy. ■ Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade. Maintenance Ambient Temperature 531 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 532 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check Oil Check We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel. Park the vehicle on level ground. Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil. 1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel. 3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its hole. 4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary. Maintenance 532 Upper Mark Lower Mark 1Oil Check If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 533 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil Adding Engine Oil 1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the engine oil dipstick. 1Adding Engine Oil NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage. If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components. Engine Oil Fill Cap Maintenance 533 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 534 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly. Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the information display */multi-information display *. 1. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, and then turn the Under engine off. Cover 2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2WD models 3. Remove the bolts and clips on the undercarriage and remove the under cover. Bolt Maintenance Clip Washer Drain Bolt 534 * Not available on all models All models 4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container. 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 535 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter Oil Filter 1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer. When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The low oil pressure indicator should go off within five seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check your work. Maintenance 5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil. 6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it. 7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket. 8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m) 9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter): 3.9 US qt (3.7 L) 10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and start the engine. 11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter. 12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil. 535 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 536 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant Engine Coolant Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water. We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly. 1Engine Coolant 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. ■ Reserve Tank MAX MIN 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. Maintenance Reserve Tank 3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks. NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details. If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible. Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components. 536 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 537 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant ■ Radiator Radiator Cap 1Radiator 1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool. 2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system. Do not push the cap down when turning. 3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it. 4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low. 5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully. NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment. Maintenance 537 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 538 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid Transmission Fluid ■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid yourself. Maintenance 538 1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid NOTICE Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle limited warranty. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 539 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid Brake Fluid Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 NOTICE ■ Checking the Brake Fluid The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank. MAX MIN 1Brake Fluid Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive damage. If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement. Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible. If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible. Maintenance 539 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 540 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid Refilling Window Washer Fluid Window Washer Reservoir Models without washer level sensor Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir. Canadian models If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the multi-information display. Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir. Maintenance 540 1Refilling Window Washer Fluid NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the window washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the window washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale build up. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 541 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Replacing Light Bulbs Headlight Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. 1Headlight Bulbs Models with halogen headlights Models with halogen headlights High beam headlight: Low beam headlight: NOTICE 60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type) 55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. Models with LED headlights High beam headlight: Low beam headlight: LED type LED type All models The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the cargo area, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician. ■ High Beam Headlights Models with halogen headlights 1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove. 3. Insert a new bulb. 4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. Bulb Models with halogen headlights When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. Models with LED headlights Coupler High beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Continued Maintenance 1High Beam Headlights Tab 541 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 542 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs ■ Low Beam Headlights 1Low Beam Headlights Models with LED headlights Models with halogen headlights 1. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to remove. 3. Insert a new bulb. 4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. Bulb Tab Coupler Maintenance 542 Low beam headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 543 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Front Turn Signal Light: 28/8 W (Amber) Front Turn Signal Light: LED type * 1Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs * Models with halogen headlights Models with LED headlights Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. 2. Pull the bulb straight out of its holder. 3. Insert a new bulb. Socket Bulb Maintenance * Not available on all models 543 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 544 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Lights Front Side Marker Lights Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Parking/Daytime Running Lights Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Maintenance 544 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 545 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs * Fog Light Bulbs * When replacing, use the following bulbs. Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type) Fog Light: LED type * 1Fog Light Bulbs * Models with LED fog lights * Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Models with halogen fog lights 1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip screwdriver, and push up the under cover. Under Cover Models with halogen fog lights Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center pin to remove the clip. Clip Push until the pin is flat. * Not available on all models Continued Maintenance Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push until it is flat. 545 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 546 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuSide Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights * Driver side Bulb Coupler Tab 2. Push the tab to remove the coupler. 3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise on driver side and clockwise on passenger side to remove. 4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light assembly and turn it clockwise on driver side and counter-clockwise on passenger side. 5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the bulb. Passenger side Bulb Coupler Maintenance Tab Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights * 546 * Not available on all models Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. 1Fog Light Bulbs * Models with halogen fog lights NOTICE Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter. When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 547 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear Turn Signal Light Bulbs Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber) 1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the bolts. 2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar. Bolt Bulb Maintenance Socket 3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. 4. Remove the old bulb. 5. Insert a new bulb. 6. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on the body. 547 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 548 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuBack-Up Light Bulbs Back-Up Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Back-Up Light: 16 W 1. Remove the cover by prying on the edge using a flat-tip screwdriver. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches. Cover 2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it. 3. Remove the old bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb. Bulb Maintenance 548 Socket 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 549 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights Brake/tail/rear side marker lights are the LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. High-Mount Brake Light High-mount brake light is a LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly. Maintenance 549 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 550 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuReplacing Light BulbsuRear License Plate Light Bulbs Rear License Plate Light Bulbs When replacing, use the following bulbs. Rear License Plate Light: 5 W 1. Push the lens on the left and pull out the lens and the socket attached to it. Lens Bulb Maintenance 550 2. Remove the license plate light assembly by squeezing the tabs on both sides of the socket. 3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 551 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades Checking Wiper Blades If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass. Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 1Changing the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Lift the driver side wiper arm first, then the passenger side. NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield. 2. Press up on and hold the tab, then slide the holder off the wiper arm. Maintenance Tab Continued 551 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 552 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Front Wiper Blade Rubber 3. Slide the wiper blade out of the holder by pulling the tabbed end out. Blade Blade Tab Maintenance 552 4. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder from the bottom end. u The tab on the blade should fit in the indent of the top of the wiper holder. 5. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm securely. 6. Lower the passenger side wiper arm first, then the driver side. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 553 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber 1. Raise the wiper arm off. 2. Pivot up the bottom end of the wiper blade until it comes off from the wiper arm. Wiper Arm 1Changing the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm; it may damage the rear window. 3. Slide the wiper blade out of the end with the indent. Blade Maintenance Continued 553 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 554 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Rear Wiper Blade Rubber Retainers Holder Maintenance 554 4. Remove the retainers from the rubber blade that has been removed, and mount to a new rubber blade. 5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the holder. u Make sure it is engaged correctly, then install the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 555 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated. ■ Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure. Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating. Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly. Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge. Continued 3 WARNING Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance. Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached. If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold. Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced. Maintenance At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month. 1Checking Tires 555 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 556 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuChecking Tires ■ Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: • Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. • Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. • Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. • Excessive tread wear. 2 Wear Indicators P. 561 • Cracks or other damage around valve stem. Maintenance 556 1Checking Tires U.S. models Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 455 Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 557 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label Tire and Loading Information Label The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information. Label Example Tire Labeling Example 1Tire and Loading Information Label The tire and loading information label attached to the driver’s doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and spare. 1Tire Sizes Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below. Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size Maintenance Maximum Tire Load Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. 215/55R17 94V 215: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 17: Rim diameter in inches. 94: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). V: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating). ■ Tire Sizes Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Continued 557 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 558 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling ■ Tire Identification Number (TIN) The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire. ■ Glossary of Tire Terminology Maintenance 558 Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread. 1Tire Identification Number (TIN) DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer’s identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture. Year Week 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 559 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings. ■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Continued For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Maintenance ■ Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. 1Uniform Tire Quality Grading 559 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 560 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) Maintenance 560 ■ Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. 1Traction ■ Temperature The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. 1Temperature Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 561 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators Wear Indicators Example of a Wear Indicator mark The groove where the wear indicator is located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads. Tire Service Life The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use). Maintenance In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear. 561 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 562 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement Tire and Wheel Replacement Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly. It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs. Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. Maintenance 562 1Tire and Wheel Replacement 3 WARNING Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner’s manual. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 563 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation Tire Rotation Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display */ multi-information display * helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life. ■ Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. Front 1Tire Rotation Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below. Front Direction Mark ■ Tires with rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here. * Not available on all models Maintenance Front U.S. models Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 455 563 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 564 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires Winter Tires If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving. Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding. 1Winter Tires 3 WARNING Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains. NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle. Maintenance 564 When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle operational limits. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 565 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuChecking and Maintaining Tires uWinter Tires Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law. When mounting, refer to the following points. For winter tires: • Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. • Mount the tires to all four wheels. For tire chains: • Install them on the front tires only. • Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the chains listed below: Models with 215/55R17 tires Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1036 Models with 225/50R18 tires Not recommended to use any type of chains Maintenance • Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can. • Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. • Drive slowly. Models with 225/50R18 tires Your vehicle’s tires are not suitable for mounting any traction device. 565 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 566 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Battery Checking the Battery The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the information display */multi-information display * will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. 1Battery 3 WARNING The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation. Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly. If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead: • The audio system is disabled. 2 Audio System Theft Protection P. 230 • The clock resets. 2 Clock P. 134 When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it. WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Maintenance 566 A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you. When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information. * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 567 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuBatteryuCharging the Battery Charging the Battery Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system. Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last. 1Battery When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion. Maintenance 567 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 568 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Button Battery If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. ■ Keys with Remote Transmitter * Screw Battery type: CR1620 1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver. 2. Open the remote transmitter. u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching the transmitter. Battery Maintenance 568 3. Remove the button battery with the small flat-tip screwdriver. 4. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. 1Replacing the Button Battery 3 WARNING CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately. NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer. * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 569 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery ■ Smart Entry Remote * Battery type: CR2032 1. Remove the built-in key. Battery Maintenance * Not available on all models 2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the edge with a coin. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons. u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent scratching the smart entry remote. 3. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. 569 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 570 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance Air Conditioning To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842. 1Heating and Cooling System */Climate Control System * Maintenance NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed. The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 78 2 Specifications P. 614 Canadian models : Caution Maintenance : Flammable Refrigerant : Requires Registered Technician to Service The heating and cooling system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter. We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust. 570 : Air Conditioning System Dust and Pollen Filter * Not available on all models 1Dust and Pollen Filter If the airflow from the heating and cooling system */ climate control system * deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 571 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Cleaning Interior Care Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue. ■ Cleaning Seat Belts Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loop of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth. Loop 1Interior Care Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them. Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer. Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline. ■ Cleaning the Window 1Cleaning the Window Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them. Wipe using a glass cleaner. Maintenance After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing. Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front sensor camera * and the rainfall/light sensor *. * Not available on all models Continued 571 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 572 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCleaninguInterior Care ■ Floor Mats 1Floor Mats Unlock Lock The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position. If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If they are not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats. ■ Maintaining Genuine Leather * Maintenance 572 To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90% water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade. * Not available on all models 1Maintaining Genuine Leather * It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 573 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCleaninguExterior Care Exterior Care Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it. ■ Washing the Vehicle 1Washing the Vehicle Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: • If driving on roads with road salt. • If driving in coastal areas. • If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces. Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction. ■ Using an Automated Car Wash • Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. • Fold in the door mirrors. • For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off. • Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. • Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to enter the vehicle interior. • Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead, use low pressure water and a mild detergent. Continued Maintenance ■ Using High Pressure Cleaners Air Intake Vents 573 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 574 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Applying Wax A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary. ■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water. ■ Cleaning the Window Wipe using a glass cleaner. ■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels Maintenance 574 Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet. 1Applying Wax NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately. 1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 575 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCleaninguExterior Care ■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Maintenance 575 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 576 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Accessories and Modifications Accessories When installing accessories, check the following: • Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and delay your reaction to driving conditions. • Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy. • Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle. 2 Fuses P. 604 • Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation. Maintenance 576 1Accessories and Modifications 3 WARNING Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle’s handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed. Follow all instructions in this owner’s manual regarding accessories and modifications. Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 577 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications Modifications Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect. Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations. The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle’s electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems. Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components. Maintenance 577 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 578 578 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 579 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Handling the Unexpected This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles. Tools Types of Tools .................................. 580 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 582 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 591 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak .. 592 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 593 Jump Starting.................................... 594 Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 596 Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 597 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On....599 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ................................................. 599 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 600 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On ................................................. 601 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 601 If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On ....................... 602 If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 603 Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 604 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 608 Emergency Towing........................... 609 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate.....610 579 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 580 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Tools Types of Tools 1Types of Tools 2WD models The tools are stored in the cargo area. Jack Tool Case Handling the Unexpected Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle Jack Jack Handle Bar 580 Detachable Towing Hook 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 581 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuToolsuTypes of Tools AWD models Storage Bag Tool Case Jack Detachable Towing Hook Jack Handling the Unexpected Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle Jack Handle Bar Storage Bag 581 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 582 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced. 1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Put the transmission into (P . 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. 1Changing a Flat Tire Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible. Handling the Unexpected The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle. Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire. Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 582 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 583 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire 1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is specially adapted to fit the holder shaft. Do not use any other tool. 1. Open the cargo area floor lid. The shape of the tool case varies by model. Floor Lid 2WD models Spare Tire Jack Take the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar and jack out of the tool case. AWD models Take the wheel nut wrench and jack handle bar out of the tool case. Tool Case AWD models Spare Tire All models Handling the Unexpected 2. Take the tool case out of the cargo area. 2WD models 3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire. Tool Case Continued 583 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 584 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire AWD models 4. Turn the jack’s end bracket anti-clockwise to loosen it, then remove the jack. Jack All models Handling the Unexpected 584 5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire. The tire to be replaced. Wheel Blocks 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 585 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire 6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced. Continued Handling the Unexpected 7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench. 585 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 586 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ How to Set Up the Jack 1How to Set Up the Jack 1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed. 3 WARNING The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath. Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and no person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle that is supported by a jack. Handling the Unexpected 2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch. 3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground. Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle. Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or may not fit the jacking point. The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely: • Do not use while the engine is running. • Use only where the ground is firm and level. • Use only at the jacking points. • Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. • Do not put anything on top of or underneath the jack. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving. Jack Handle Bar 586 Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 587 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire ■ Replacing the Flat Tire 1Replacing the Flat Tire 1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire. Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe. Wheel Nut Handling the Unexpected 2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth. 3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating. 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m) Continued 587 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 588 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire 2WD models ■ Storing the Flat Tire Wing Bolt Spacer Cone Handling the Unexpected 588 For full-size tire For compact spare tire 1Storing the Flat Tire 1. Remove the center cap. 2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well. 3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt. 4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench, jack handle bar and jack back in the tool case. Store the case in the cargo area under the cargo floor lid. 3 WARNING Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 589 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire AWD models ■ Storing the Flat Tire 1Storing the Flat Tire 1. Put the flat tire in the storage bag provided with your vehicle. u The storage bag is in the tool case. 2. Knot the top of the storage bag. 3. Store the jack in its holder. Turn the jack’s end bracket to lock it in place. 4. Securely store the wheel nut wrench and jack handle bar back in the tool case. Belt Rear Anchor Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants. Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving. Handling the Unexpected 5. Bore through the bag, and pass the holding belt through the hole of the bag and the wheel of the flat tire as shown. 3 WARNING 6. Place the flat tire in the cargo area, and thread the belt through the rear anchor as shown. 7. Pass the belt through the ring, and tighten the belt to secure the flat tire in place. Continued 589 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 590 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire U.S. models ■ TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire Pressure Monitor Problem will appear on the multi-information display * and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern. Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire. 2 TPMS Calibration P. 455 Handling the Unexpected 590 * Not available on all models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 591 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine If the engine does not start, check the starter. 1Checking the Engine If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle to jump start it. 2 Jump Starting P. 594 Checklist Models with smart entry system Check for a message on the multi-information display *. • If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears. 2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 592 uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range. 2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 166 Check the brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness. • If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all 2 Battery P. 566 The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn’t start. There may be a problem with the fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. • If the interior lights come on normally 2 Fuses P. 604 Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again. 2 Starting the Engine P. 432, 435 Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started. Handling the Unexpected Starter condition Starter doesn’t turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly. 2 Immobilizer System P. 159 Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank. 2 Fuel Gauge P. 117, 120 Check the fuse. Check all fuses, or have your vehicle checked by a dealer. 2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 608 If the problem continues: 2 Emergency Towing P. 609 * Not available on all models 591 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 592 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak Models with smart entry system If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak Handling the Unexpected 592 If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears on the multi-information display, the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won’t start, start the engine as follows: 1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the smart entry remote while the ENGINE START/ STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the smart entry remote should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button flashes for about 30 seconds. 2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds while the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 593 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop Models with smart entry system Emergency Engine Stop The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: • Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. • Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times. Canadian models Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake pedal. Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds. Handling the Unexpected The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place. The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop. 1Emergency Engine Stop 593 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 594 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Jump Starting ■ Jump Starting Procedure 1Jump Starting Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine, then open the hood. 1. Connect the first jumper cable to your vehicle’s battery + terminal. u Remove the cover from the under-hood fuse box. 2 Engine Compartment Fuse Box P. 604 Handling the Unexpected 594 Booster Battery 2. Connect the other end of the first jumper cable to the booster battery + terminal. u Use a 12-volt booster battery only. u When using the automotive battery charger to boost your 12-volt battery, select a lower charging voltage than 15volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting. 3. Connect the second jumper cable to the booster battery - terminal. 4. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part. 5. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine and increase its rpm slightly. 6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact. 3 WARNING A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby. Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery. Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables. Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 595 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuJump Startingu ■ What to Do After the Engine Starts Once your vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order. 1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s stud bolt. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle’s battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery + terminal. Handling the Unexpected Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer. 595 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 596 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Shift Lever Does Not Move Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position. ■ Releasing the Lock 1. Set the parking brake. Models without smart entry system 2. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Slot Cover Handling the Unexpected All models Shift Lock Release Slot Release Button 596 Models with smart entry system 2. Remove the built-in key from the smart entry remote. 3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover. 4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key down, press the shift lever release button, and place the shift lever into (N . u The lock is now released. Have the shift lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 597 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Overheating How to Handle Overheating Overheating symptoms are as follows: • The high temperature indicator (red) comes on or the engine suddenly loses power. • Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment. Continued 3 WARNING Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out. NOTICE Continuing to drive with the high temperature indicator on may damage the engine. Handling the Unexpected ■ First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights. u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides. Then open the hood. 1How to Handle Overheating 597 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 598 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating ■ Next thing to do MAX MIN Reserve Tank 1How to Handle Overheating Handling the Unexpected 1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the high temperature indicator goes off. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine. 2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on. ■ Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the high temperature indicator. If the high temperature indicator is off, resume driving. If it stays on, contact a dealer for repairs. 598 3 WARNING Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you. Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap. If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs. Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 599 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low. ■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on. ■ What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level. u Add oil as necessary. 1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. 2 Oil Check P. 532 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when the battery is not being charged. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Turn off the heating and cooling system */climate control system *, rear defogger, and other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs. * Not available on all models 1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery. Handling the Unexpected 3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator. u The indicator goes off: Start driving again. u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs. 599 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 600 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks Handling the Unexpected ■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink • Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control system, or the fuel fill cap is missing, or loose. • Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. ■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools. ■ Check/Tighten Fuel Cap Message ■ The message appears on when: An evaporative system leak is detected. This may be caused by the fuel fill cap being loose or not being installed. ■ What to do when the message appears: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Check that the fuel fill cap is fully installed. u If not, loosen the cap, and then retighten it until it clicks at least once. 3. Drive for several days of normal driving. u The message should go off. ■ When the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if the system continues to detect a leak of gasoline vapor. If this happens, check the fuel fill cap using the procedures described above. 600 1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged. If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 601 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On U.S. Canada ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • The brake fluid is low. • There is a malfunction in the brake system. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. • If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. • If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on • Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. • If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine. If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears. If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately. Handling the Unexpected If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On 1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On 601 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 602 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the electric parking brake system. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Avoid using the parking brake and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. ■ What to do when the electric parking brake indicator comes on or blinks at the same time. Release the parking brake. Handling the Unexpected 602 2 Parking Brake P. 503 • If the electric parking brake indicator remains on or blinks even after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and call a dealer. u To prevent your vehicle from moving, put the transmission into (P . • If only the electric parking brake indicator goes off, immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. 1If the Electric Parking Brake System Indicator Comes On If you apply the parking brake, it may not release. If the electric parking brake indicator also turns on, the parking brake is still applied. When the electric parking brake indicator blinks at the same time as the electric parking brake system indicator, the system must be checked. The parking brake may not operate under these conditions. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 603 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks U.S. models If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level. Handling the Unexpected A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. ■ What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb. u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted. ■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers). 1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks 603 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 604 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Fuses Fuse Locations If any electrical devices are not working, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown. ■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box ■ Fuse box A Handling the Unexpected Located near the brake fluid reservoir. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number. Tab ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 604 * Not available on all models Circuit Protected Amps Headlight Low Beam Main 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Sliding * (20 A) Hazard 10 A Drive By Wire 15 A Wiper * (30 A) Stop 10 A IGP 15 A IG Coil 15 A Daytime Running Lights (10 A) – (20 A) – (30 A) Main Fan 30 A Starter SW * (30 A) MG Clutch 7.5 A Battery Sensor (7.5 A) Small Light 10 A Driver’s Power Seat (20 A) Reclining * Horn 10 A Fog Light * (10 A) Heated Windshield*2 (10 A) Circuit Protected 21 Back Up 22 Audio 23 Sub Fan 24 – 25 STRLD * 26 IGP CAM * 27 – 28 – 29 – 30 IGP LAF 31 IGPS 32 Right Headlight Low Beam 33 Left Headlight Low Beam Amps 10 A (10 A) (30 A) (30 A) (7.5 A) (7.5 A) – – (30 A) (7.5 A) (7.5 A) 10 A 10 A *1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. *2:Canadian models 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 605 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Fuse box B Pull up the cover on the + terminal, then remove it while pulling out the tab as shown. Replacement of engine compartment fuses should be done by a dealer. ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating a b c d Circuit Protected Battery Main RB Main 1 RB Main 2 CAP Main Amps 100 A 70 A 80 A 70 A Tab Handling the Unexpected a b c d Continued 605 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 606 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Interior Fuse Boxes ■ Fuse box A Fuse Label Handling the Unexpected 606 Located behind the instrument panel. Fuse locations are shown on the label under the steering column. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number. * Not available on all models ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Circuit Protected Amps Door Lock 20 A – – Smart * (10 A) Driver Side Door Unlock 10 A Passenger Side Door Unlock 10 A Driver Door Unlock 10 A Driver Door Lock 10 A Driver’s Power Window 20 A Passenger’s Power Window 20 A Rear Left Power Window 20 A Rear Right Power Window 20 A Driver Side Door Lock 10 A Passenger Side Door Lock 10 A – – Right Headlight High Beam 10 A STS * (7.5 A) – (20 A) Moonroof * (20 A) Front Seat Heater * (20 A) – – 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Circuit Protected Adaptive Cruise Control * Washer Rear Wiper * A/C Daytime Running Lights Starter Cut * ABS/VSA SRS Left Headlight High Beam ACG IG Relay Fuel Pump SRS Meter Mission SOL Front Accessory Power Socket ACC – Option Rear Wiper − − Amps (7.5 A) 15 A (10 A) 7.5 A 7.5 A (7.5 A) 7.5 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 15 A (7.5 A) 7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A (7.5 A) (7.5 A) 10 A 10 A − − 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 607 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFusesuFuse Locations ■ Fuse box B ■ Circuit protected and fuse rating Circuit Protected EPS IG Main 1 Fuse Label Cover Remove the cover by putting the flat-tip screwdriver into the side slot as shown. * Not available on all models 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12*1 12*2 13 14 15*1 15*2 Circuit Protected – – AWD * – Rear Accessory Power Socket*3 – Interior Light Accessory Power Socket (Console) − − ACC Key Lock Heated Door Mirror * A/C Blower SW * – Wiper Amps – – (20 A) (10 A) (20 A) – 7.5 A (20 A) − − (7.5 A) (10 A) (7.5 A) – 30 A Handling the Unexpected 2 Fuse Box Main 2 ABS/VSA Motor Fuse Box Main 1 Fuse Box Main 3 * Rear Defogger Left Electric Parking Brake IG Main2*1 –*2 Heater Motor Right Electric Parking Brake ABS/VSA FSR Amps 70 A 30 A*1 50 A*2 50 A 40 A 30 A 40 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 40 A 30 A 30 A *1:Models with smart entry system *2:Models without smart entry system *3:Canadian models 607 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 608 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses Inspecting and Changing Fuses 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn headlights and all accessories off. 2. Check the fuses on the battery in the engine compartment. u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a dealer. Blown Fuse Box on the Battery Handling the Unexpected 3. Remove the fuse box cover. 4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one. Fuse Puller 5. Check the large fuse in the vehicle interior. u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the screw and replace it with a new one. Combined Fuse Blown Fuse *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. 608 1Inspecting and Changing Fuses NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage. Confirm the specified amperage using the charts on 2 Fuse Locations P. 604 There is a fuse puller in the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 609 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Emergency Towing Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle. All models ■ Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle. 1Emergency Towing NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle’s weight. NOTICE 2WD models Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break. 2WD models Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flat bed equipment. 2 Parking Brake P. 503 Handling the Unexpected ■ Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle. Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission. 609 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 610 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 When You Cannot Open the Tailgate ■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Tailgate If you cannot open the tailgate, use the following procedure. 1. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip screwdriver. Put it into the cover as shown in the image, and open it. Handling the Unexpected 610 Cover 2. Wrap a cloth around the flat-tip screwdriver. Put it into the lid as shown in the image, and open the lid. Lid 1When You Cannot Open the Tailgate Follow Up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have your vehicle checked. When you open the tailgate from inside, make sure there is enough space around the tailgate, and it does not hit anyone or any object. 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 611 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWhen You Cannot Open the Tailgateu 3. To open the tailgate, push the tailgate while sliding the lever to the right. Lever Handling the Unexpected 611 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 612 612 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 613 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Information This chapter includes your vehicle’s specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation. Specifications.................................... 614 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 616 Devices that Emit Radio Waves....... 617 Reporting Safety Defects................. 618 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 619 Warranty Coverages ........................ 621 Authorized Manuals......................... 623 Customer Service Information......... 624 613 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 614 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Specifications ■ Vehicle Specifications ■ Engine Specifications Model No. of Passengers: Front Rear Total Weights: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front) Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear) Displacement HR-V 2 3 5 See the certification label on the driver’s doorjamb See the certification label on the driver’s doorjamb See the certification label on the driver’s doorjamb Spark Plugs ■ Fuel Fuel: Type Fuel Tank Capacity Refrigerant Type Charge Quantity Lubricant Type Quantity HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) 13.9 - 15.7 oz (395 - 445 g) ND-OIL14 (POE) 4.27-5.00 cu-in (70-82 cm3) Information 614 ■ Light Bulbs Headlights (Low Beam) Headlights (High Beam) Fog Lights * Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher 13.2 US gal (50 L) ■ Washer Fluid Tank Capacity ■ Air Conditioning 109.8 cu-in (1,799 cm3) NGK DILZKR7B11GS DENSO DXU22HCR-D11S U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L) Parking/Daytime Running Lights Front Side Marker Lights Front Turn Signal Lights Side Turn Signal Lights * Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights Back-Up Lights Rear Turn Signal Lights High-Mount Brake Light Rear License Plate Lights Interior Lights Vanity Mirror Light * Map Lights Ceiling Light Console Panel Light Cargo Area Light *1: Models without navigation system *2: Models with navigation system * Not available on all models 55W (H11)*1 LED*2 60W (HB3)*1 LED*2 35W (H8)*1 LED*2 LED LED 28/8W (Amber)*1 LED*2 LED LED 16W 21W (Amber) LED 5W 1.4W 8W 8W LED 5W 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 615 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuSpecificationsu ■ Brake Fluid Specified ■ Engine Oil Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 ■ Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid Specified Capacity Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid 3.7 US qt (3.5 L)*1 Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 L)*2 *1: 2WD *2: AWD Capacity ■ Engine Coolant Specified Ratio ■ Rear Differential Fluid * Specified Capacity Recommended Honda DPSF-II Change Capacity 1.318 US qt (1.247 L) ■ Tire ·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 3.7 US qt (3.5 L) Change including 3.9 US qt (3.7 L) filter Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2 50/50 with distilled water 1.39 US gal (5.25L) (change including the remaining 0.13 US gal (0.5 L) in the reserve tank) Size*1 Regular Compact Spare Wheel Size Front Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) Rear Size Pressure psi (kPa[kgf/cm2]) Regular Compact Spare 215/55R17 94V 225/50R18 95V 32 (220 [2.2]) 30 (210 [2.1])*2 28 (190 [1.9])*3 T135/90D16 102M 60 (420 [4.2]) 17 x 7 1/2J*2 18 x 7 1/2J*3 16 x 4T *1: Original tire size is mentioned on the tire information label on the driver’s doorjamb. *2: Models with 215/55R17 *3: Models with 225/50R18 Information * Not available on all models 615 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 616 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows. Engine Number 1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover. Vehicle Identification Number Cover Information 616 Continuously Variable Transmission Number Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 617 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Devices that Emit Radio Waves Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below: As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Information This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 617 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 618 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Reporting Safety Defects In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada. Information If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety. 618 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 619 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected. To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. 1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions. If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer. If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following: Information 1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20 seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P . Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about three minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds. *1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch. Continued 619 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 620 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes 7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D . Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds). 8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal. 9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes. Information 620 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 621 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Warranty Coverages ■ U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties: New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship. Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information. Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage. Information Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details. Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship. Continued 621 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 622 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuWarranty Coveragesu Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer. Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle. Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet. ■ Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle. ■ EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting: Information 622 Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; [email protected] 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 623 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Authorized Manuals ■ Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. ■ For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. ■ For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require. Information 623 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 624 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Customer Service Information Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services. U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Services Mail Stop 100-5E-8A 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009 Information 624 In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546 Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: [email protected] 1Customer Service Information When you call or write, please give us the following information: • Vehicle Identification Number 2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 616 • Date of purchase • Odometer reading of your vehicle • Your name, address, and telephone number • A detailed description of the problem • Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 625 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 uuCustomer Service Informationu ■ Disclaimer of Pandora® * Requirements to access Pandora® • Latest version of the Pandora app installed on your Android, Blackberry, or iPhone. • Registered Pandora account (you can create a free account at www.pandora.com or on your smartphone) • Connection to the internet via WiFi or cellular data network. • Android devices must be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth, iPhone devices may be connected via Bluetooth or USB. Information * Not available on all models Limitations • Access to Pandora requires an active internet connection • Ability to access Pandora through this system is subject to change without notice • Certain functionality of Pandora service is not available when accessing the service through this system including, but not limited to, creating new stations, deleting stations, emailing current stations, buying songs, viewing additional text information, logging in to Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Quality. Pandora internet radio is a music service not affiliated with HONDA. More information is available at http:// www.pandora.com . Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. • Mobile access requires a smartphone with an active data plan. Standard data rates may apply. • Pandora is only available in the United States. 625 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 626 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Index Index Numbers 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 444 A Index 626 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 508 Accessories and Modifications ................. 576 Accessory Power Sockets .......................... 207 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Indicator .................................................... 96 Additives Coolant ................................................... 536 Engine Oil................................................ 531 Washer.................................................... 540 Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 531 Adjusting Armrest ................................................... 200 Front Seats .............................................. 190 Head Restraints........................................ 197 Mirrors .................................................... 187 Rear Seats................................................ 193 Steering Wheel ........................................ 186 Temperature.................................... 114, 117 Adjusting the Sound......................... 239, 271 Air Conditioning System Climate Control System ........................... 216 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ....................................... 215, 219 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 570 Heating and Cooling System.................... 212 Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) Synchronization Mode............................. 224 Air Conditioning System (Heating and Cooling System) Cooling ................................................... 215 Heating ................................................... 214 Air Pressure....................................... 557, 615 Airbags........................................................ 50 Advanced Airbags ..................................... 56 Airbag Care............................................... 63 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 53 Indicator.............................................. 61, 87 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 62 Sensors ..................................................... 50 Side Airbags .............................................. 57 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 59 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................ 454 Android Auto ........................................... 316 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 508 Indicator.................................................... 87 Apple CarPlay ........................................... 312 Armrest ..................................................... 200 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 231 Audio System............................................ 228 Adjusting the Sound........................ 239, 271 Error Messages........................................ 323 General Information ................................ 329 iPod ................................................ 246, 290 MP3/WMA/AAC...................... 243, 249, 299 Recommended CDs ................................ 330 Recommended Devices ........................... 332 Remote Controls..................................... 231 Security Code ......................................... 230 Theft Protection ...................................... 230 USB Flash Drives...................................... 332 USB Port(s).............................................. 229 Audio/Information Screen ............... 235, 256 Authorized Manuals ................................ 623 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 152 Customize .............................................. 153 Auto High-Beam ...................................... 176 Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 506 Indicator ........................................... 83, 506 Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator ........................................... 83, 506 Automatic Climate Control Sensors ........ 225 Average Fuel Economy .................... 116, 121 Average Speed ......................................... 121 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 627 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 B 午後３時５２分 Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. Rear License Plate Lights .......................... Rear Turn Signal Lights ............................ Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights .................................................... Bulb Specifications ................................... 544 550 547 546 614 C Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 77 Cargo Cover .............................................. 210 Cargo Floor Box ........................................ 206 Carrying Cargo.................................. 425, 427 CD Player ................................................... 243 Certification Label .................................... 616 Changing Bulbs......................................... 541 Charging System Indicator ................. 85, 599 Child Safety................................................. 64 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 151 Child Seat .................................................... 64 Booster Seats............................................. 76 Child Seat for Infants ................................. 66 Child Seat for Small Children ..................... 67 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt.......................................................... 71 Larger Children.......................................... 75 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 66 Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 68 Childproof Door Locks ............................. 151 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 573 Cleaning the Interior ................................ 571 Climate Control System............................ 216 Synchronization Mode............................. 224 Clock.......................................................... 134 Coat Hook................................................. 208 Compact Spare Tire .......................... 582, 615 Continuously Variable Transmission ....... 439 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode.................... 444 Creeping ................................................. 439 Kickdown................................................ 439 Operating the Shift Lever........... 23, 441, 443 Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 596 Shifting ........................................... 440, 442 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid........................................................ 538 Controls..................................................... 133 Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 536 Adding to the Radiator............................ 537 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 536 High Temperature Indicator....................... 88 Low Temperature Indicator........................ 88 Overheating ............................................ 597 Creeping (Continuously Variable Transmission) .......................................... 439 Cruise Control........................................... 447 Indicator.................................................... 93 Cup Holders .............................................. 204 Customer Service Information................. 624 Customized Features................ 123, 345, 352 Index Battery ...................................................... 566 Charging System Indicator ................ 85, 599 Jump Starting ......................................... 594 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 566 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 568 Belts (Seat).................................................. 40 Beverage Holders..................................... 204 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............ 370, 393 Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 76 Brake System ............................................ 503 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 508 Automatic Brake Hold............................. 506 Brake Assist System................................. 509 Foot Brake .............................................. 505 Indicator (Amber)...................................... 81 Indicator (Red) .................................. 80, 601 Parking Brake.......................................... 503 Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............... 81 Brake System Indicator (Red) .................... 80 Brake/Clutch System Fluid ....................................................... 539 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) ... 184 Bulb Replacement.................................... 541 Back-Up Lights........................................ 548 Brake/Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights........... 549 Fog Lights ............................................... 545 Front Side Marker Lights ......................... 544 Front Turn Signal Lights .......................... 543 Headlights .............................................. 541 High-Mount Brake Light.......................... 549 木曜日 627 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 628 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 D Index 628 Daytime Running Lights........................... 175 Dead Battery ............................................. 594 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows.......................................... 215, 219 Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 617 Dimming Headlights ............................................... 171 Rearview Mirror ............................... 187, 188 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 532 Directional Signals (Turn Signal).............. 170 Display Setup .................................... 240, 272 Door Mirrors ............................................. 189 Doors ......................................................... 136 Auto Door Locking .................................. 152 Auto Door Unlocking............................... 152 Door and Tailgate Open Indicator ...................................... 38, 39, 89 Keys ........................................................ 136 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside............................................... 148 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside............................................ 139 Lockout Prevention System ...................... 147 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 559 Driving....................................................... 423 Braking.................................................... 503 Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 439 Cruise Control ......................................... 447 Shifting Position............................... 440, 442 Starting the Engine .......................... 432, 435 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 570 E ECO Assist® System ....................................... 9 ECON Button ............................................ 446 ECON Mode Indicator ................................ 93 Elapsed Time............................................. 121 Electric Parking Brake Indicator.................................................... 82 Electric Parking Brake System Indicator............................................ 82, 602 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator............................................ 90, 601 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)............. 450 Emergency ................................................ 609 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 619 Engine Coolant................................................... 536 Jump Starting.......................................... 594 Number................................................... 616 Oil........................................................... 531 Starting ........................................... 432, 435 Switch Buzzer.......................................... 165 Engine Coolant......................................... 536 Adding to the Radiator............................ 537 Adding to the Reserve Tank..................... 536 High Temperature Indicator....................... 88 Low Temperature Indicator........................ 88 Overheating ............................................ 597 Engine Oil................................................. 531 Adding ................................................... 533 Checking ................................................ 532 Displaying Oil Life ........................... 521, 525 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 85, 599 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 531 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) ................................................ 77 Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 573 Exterior Mirrors........................................ 189 F Features .................................................... 227 Filters Dust and Pollen....................................... 570 Oil .......................................................... 534 Flat Tire..................................................... 582 Floor Mats ................................................ 572 Fluids Brake ...................................................... 539 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) .................................................... 538 Engine Coolant ....................................... 536 Windshield Washer ................................. 540 FM/AM Radio ................................... 241, 278 Fog Light Indicator .................................... 92 Folding Down the Rear Seats .................. 194 Folding the Rear Seat Up ........................ 195 Foot Brake ................................................ 505 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 53 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 629 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Front Seats Adjusting ................................................ 190 Front Sensor Camera ............................... 500 Fuel ..................................................... 25, 513 Economy................................................. 515 Gauge ............................................ 117, 120 Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 116, 121 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 87 Range ............................................. 116, 121 Recommendation.................................... 513 Refueling .......................................... 25, 513 Fuel Economy ........................................... 515 Fuel Fill Cap ........................................ 25, 514 Message ................................................. 600 Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 25, 514 Fuel Gauge ....................................... 117, 120 Fuses ......................................................... 604 Inspecting and Changing ........................ 608 Locations ................................................ 604 G 午後３時５２分 Glove Box .................................................. 203 H Halogen Bulbs................................... 541, 546 Handling the Unexpected ........................ 579 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ....................... 370, 393 Displaying Messages ................................ 418 In Case of Emergency .............................. 421 Menus ............................................. 372, 396 Phone Setup .................................... 376, 400 Phonebook Phonetic Modification ........... 409 To Set Up Text Message Options ............. 403 Hazard Warning Button............................... 4 HD RadioTM ................................................ 279 Head Restraints......................................... 197 Headlights................................................. 171 Aiming .................................................... 541 Auto High-Beam...................................... 176 Dimming ......................................... 171, 175 Operating ................................................ 171 Heated Door Mirrors ................................ 182 Heated Windshield ................................... 183 Heating and Cooling System ................... 212 Cooling ................................................... 215 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows ............................................... 215 Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 570 Heating ................................................... 214 HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ....................... 370, 393 High Beam Indicator .................................. 91 Hill Start Assist System ..................... 434, 437 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 367 Honda App License Agreement .............. 333 Honda Sensing®.................................. 26, 460 HondaLink®............................................... 304 I Identification Numbers Engine and Transmission ......................... 616 Vehicle Identification ............................... 616 Ignition Switch ......................................... 165 Illumination Control Knob....................................................... 184 Immobilizer System .................................. 159 Indicator.................................................... 92 Important Handling Information .............. 36 Indicators .................................................... 80 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Amber)..... 96 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Green)................................................... 96 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) .............................. 94 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................... 87 Auto High-Beam ....................................... 88 Automatic Brake Hold ....................... 83, 506 Automatic Brake Hold System ........... 83, 506 Brake Depressing....................................... 84 Brake System (Amber) ............................... 81 Brake System (Red)............................ 80, 601 Charging System ............................... 85, 599 Index Gasoline (Fuel) Economy................................................. 515 Gauge ............................................ 117, 120 Information............................................. 513 Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 116, 121 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 87 Refueling ................................................ 513 Gauges...................................................... 113 Glass (care) ....................................... 571, 574 木曜日 629 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book Index 630 630 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ........................................... 97, 98 CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 93, 448 CRUISE MAIN .................................... 93, 447 Door and Tailgate Open................. 38, 39, 89 ECON Mode .............................................. 93 Electric Parking Brake................................. 82 Electric Parking Brake System............. 82, 602 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System............................................. 90, 601 Fog Light ................................................... 92 High Beam................................................. 91 High Temperature...................................... 88 Immobilizer System.................................... 92 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Amber) .................................................. 96 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (Green) ................................................... 96 Lights On................................................... 92 Low Fuel.................................................... 87 Low Oil Pressure ................................ 85, 599 Low Temperature ...................................... 88 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ............. 90, 455, 603 M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift......................................................... 86 Maintenance Minder ......................... 93, 521 Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 85, 600 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 95 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 42, 86 Security System Alarm ............................... 93 Shift Lever Position .................................... 86 木曜日 午後３時５２分 Smart Entry System ................................... 91 Supplemental Restraint System............ 61, 87 System Message Indicator ......................... 91 Transmission System.................................. 86 Turn Signal................................................ 91 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System ............................................ 89, 450 VSA® OFF .......................................... 89, 451 Information .............................................. 613 Information Display ................................. 115 Instant Fuel Economy....................... 116, 121 Instrument Panel ........................................ 79 Brightness Control................................... 184 Interior Lights ........................................... 201 Interior Rearview Mirror.................. 187, 188 Internet Radio .......................................... 297 J Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ................ 580, 586 Jump Starting ........................................... 594 K Keyless Lockout Prevention..................... 147 Keys........................................................... 136 Lockout Prevention ................................. 147 Number Tag............................................ 137 Rear Door Won’t Open ........................... 151 Remote Transmitter ................................ 144 Won’t Turn ............................................... 29 Kickdown (Continuously Variable Transmission).......................................... 439 L LaneWatchTM ............................................ 452 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 69 Lights ........................................................ 171 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 176 Bulb Replacement ................................... 541 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 175 Fog Lights ............................................... 174 High Beam Indicator ................................. 91 Interior.................................................... 201 Light Switches......................................... 171 Lights On Indicator.................................... 92 Turn Signals ............................................ 170 Load Limits ............................................... 427 Locking/Unlocking ................................... 136 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 152 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 151 From Inside ............................................. 148 From Outside .......................................... 139 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 631 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 Keys........................................................ 136 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 147 Using a Key............................................. 146 Lockout Prevention System ..................... 147 Low Battery Charge ................................. 599 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 87 Low Oil Pressure Indicator................. 85, 599 Lower Anchors ........................................... 69 Lubricant Specifications Chart ................ 615 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit) ............. 427 M 午後３時５２分 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 85, 600 Map Lights ................................................ 202 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 427 Meters, Gauges ......................................... 113 Mirrors....................................................... 187 Adjusting................................................. 187 Door........................................................ 189 Exterior.................................................... 189 Interior Rearview ............................. 187, 188 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 576 Moonroof.................................................. 164 MP3 ........................................... 243, 249, 299 Multi-Information Display ....................... 118 Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 511 N Numbers (Identification) .......................... 616 O Odometer.......................................... 116, 120 Off-Highway Driving Guidelines ............. 430 Oil (Engine) ............................................... 531 Adding .................................................... 533 Checking ................................................. 532 Displaying Oil Life .................................... 521 Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information ........................................... 525 Low Oil Pressure Indicator.................. 85, 599 Recommended Engine Oil........................ 531 Viscosity .................................................. 531 Open Source Licenses............................... 322 Opening and Closing the Moonroof....... 164 Opening/Closing Hood....................................................... 530 Moonroof ............................................... 164 Power Windows ...................................... 162 Tailgate ................................................... 156 Outside Temperature Display.......... 114, 117 Overheating.............................................. 597 P Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)........................................ 23, 444, 445 Pandora®................................................... 297 Panic Mode ............................................... 161 Parking...................................................... 510 Parking Brake ........................................... 503 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ....... 62 Passing Indicators ..................................... 171 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................ 252, 302 Power Windows ....................................... 162 Precautions While Driving Driving Guidelines for Your Utility Vehicle .................................................. 438 Rain ........................................................ 438 Pregnant Women ....................................... 48 Puncture (Tire).......................................... 582 Index Maintenance ............................................ 517 Battery.................................................... 566 Brake Fluid.............................................. 539 Cleaning ................................................. 571 Coolant .................................................. 536 Heating and Cooling System/Climate Control System .................................................. 570 Maintenance Minder............................... 521 Oil .......................................................... 532 Precautions ............................................. 519 Radiator.................................................. 537 Remote Transmitter ................................ 568 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 541 Safety ..................................................... 519 Service Items................................... 523, 527 Tires........................................................ 555 Transmission Fluid................................... 538 Under the Hood...................................... 529 木曜日 631 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book Index 632 632 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 R S Radiator..................................................... 537 Radio (FM/AM).................................. 241, 278 Radio (SiriusXM®)...................................... 282 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 242, 280 Range ................................................ 116, 121 RDS (Radio Data System).................. 242, 280 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 619 Real Time AWD with Intelligent Control SystemTM .................................................. 454 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror Button...................................................... 182 Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 194 Rearview Mirror................................ 187, 188 Refueling................................................... 513 Fuel Gauge ...................................... 117, 120 Gasoline .......................................... 513, 614 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 87 Regulations ............................... 458, 559, 617 Remote Transmitter.................................. 144 Replacement Battery..................................................... 568 Bulbs ....................................................... 541 Fuses ............................................... 604, 606 Tires ........................................................ 562 Wiper Blade Rubber......................... 551, 553 Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 618 Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 116, 120 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) Indicator .................................................... 95 Safe Driving ................................................ 33 Safety Check ............................................... 38 Safety Labels............................................... 78 Safety Message............................................. 1 Seat Belts .................................................... 40 Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 46 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 43 Checking................................................... 49 Detachable Anchor.................................... 47 Fastening .................................................. 44 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 71 Pregnant Women ...................................... 48 Reminder .................................................. 42 Warning Indicator ............................... 42, 86 Seat Heaters.............................................. 211 Seats .......................................................... 190 Adjusting ................................................ 190 Front Seats .............................................. 190 Rear Seats ............................................... 193 Security System......................................... 159 Immobilizer System Indicator ..................... 92 Security System Alarm Indicator................. 93 SEL/RESET Button ..................................... 119 Select/Reset Knob............................. 115, 119 Selecting a Child Seat................................. 68 Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 234 Setting the Clock ...................................... 134 Shift Lever .................................. 23, 440, 442 Operation ................................. 23, 441, 443 Releasing ................................................ 596 Won’t Move ........................................... 596 Shift Lever Position Indicator .... 86, 441, 443 Shifting (Transmission) .................... 440, 442 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 46 Side Airbags ............................................... 57 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 59 Siri Eyes Free............................................. 311 SiriusXM® Radio ....................................... 282 Snow Tires ................................................ 564 Spare Tire ......................................... 582, 615 Spark Plugs ............................................... 614 Specifications ........................................... 614 Specified Fuel ................................... 513, 614 Speedometer............................................ 114 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 53 Starting the Engine.......................... 432, 435 Does Not Start ........................................ 591 Engine Switch Buzzer ...................... 165, 168 Jump Starting ......................................... 594 Steering Wheel Adjusting ................................................ 186 Stopping ................................................... 510 Summer Tires............................................ 564 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 53 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel) ............................................ 4, 5, 165 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 633 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 T 午後３時５２分 Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 429 Emergency .............................................. 609 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .................................................... 455 Indicator ............................................ 90, 603 Transmission ..................................... 440, 442 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 444 Continuously Variable.............................. 439 Fluid ........................................................ 538 Number ................................................... 616 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 86, 441, 443 Trip Meter ......................................... 116, 120 Troubleshooting ....................................... 579 Blown Fuse ...................................... 604, 606 Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 30 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 30 Emergency Towing .................................. 609 Engine Won’t Start .................................. 591 Noise When Braking .................................. 31 Overheating ............................................ 597 Puncture/Flat Tire..................................... 582 Rear Door Won’t Open ...................... 30, 151 Shift Lever Won’t Move ........................... 596 Warning Indicators .................................... 80 Turn Signals .............................................. 170 Indicators (Instrument Panel)...................... 91 U Unlocking the Doors ........................ 139, 148 USB Flash Drives ....................................... 332 USB Port(s) ................................................ 229 V Vanity Mirrors............................................... 7 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)....... 616 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) .............. 450 Off Button............................................... 451 Off Indicator.............................................. 89 System Indicator........................................ 89 Viscosity (Oil) .................................... 531, 615 Voice Control Operation.......................... 274 Audio Commands ................................... 276 General Commands ................................ 277 Music Search Commands ........................ 277 On Screen Commands............................. 277 Phone Commands................................... 276 Voice Portal Screen.................................. 275 Voice Recognition ................................... 274 VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM) .............. 450 Index Tachometer .............................................. 114 Tailgate..................................................... 156 Unable to Open ...................................... 610 Temperature High Temperature Indicator ...................... 88 Low Temperature Indicator ....................... 88 Outside Temperature Display .......... 114, 117 Temperature Sensor ........................ 114, 117 Tie-down Anchors.................................... 209 Time (Setting)........................................... 134 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..................................................... 455 Indicator ........................................... 90, 603 Tires .......................................................... 555 Air Pressure..................................... 557, 615 Checking and Maintaining ...................... 555 Inspection ............................................... 556 Labeling.................................................. 557 Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 582 Regulations............................................. 559 Rotation.................................................. 563 Spare Tire ....................................... 582, 615 Summer.................................................. 564 Tire Chains.............................................. 564 Wear Indicators....................................... 561 Winter .................................................... 564 Tools ......................................................... 580 Towing a Trailer....................................... 429 木曜日 633 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 634 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 W Index 634 Walk away auto lock® .............................. 142 Wallpaper.......................................... 237, 261 Warning and Information Messages ........................................... 99, 100 Warning Indicator On/Blinking................ 599 Warning Labels ........................................... 78 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided separately)............................................... 621 Watts ......................................................... 614 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 561 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle).... 580, 586 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 309 Window Washers...................................... 179 Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 540 Switch ..................................................... 179 Windshield ................................................ 179 Cleaning.......................................... 571, 574 Defrosting/Defogging .............. 183, 215, 219 Washer Fluid............................................ 540 Wiper Blades ........................................... 551 Wipers and Washers ................................ 179 Winter Tires Snow Tires............................................... 564 Tire Chains .............................................. 564 Wipers and Washers ................................. 179 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades............................................ 551, 553 WMA ......................................... 243, 249, 299 Worn Tires......................................... 555, 561 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 635 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 20 HR-V HDMC HDMG-31T7A6400.book 636 ページ ２０１９年８月８日 木曜日 午後３時５２分 31T7A640 OM-12569 00X31-T7A-6400 owners.honda.com (U.S.) honda.ca (Canada) 2020 Honda HR-V Owner’s Manual © 2019 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. — All Rights Reserved Printed in U.S.A.